E D O N , R E S E

Workbook
Wheelocks
I A IHl ^^H The Classic Introductory Latin

I^^H^F^kB H H ^ Course^ Based on Ancient Authors

Paul T. Comeau & Richard A. LaFleur

;-5S^
:hr^t":

\
L
Workbook for
Wheelock^s Latin
I /
Workbook for
Wheelock^s Latin

Paul T. Comeau
New Mexico State University

Revised by
Richard A. LaFleur
University of Georgia

3rd Edition^ Revised

dS HarperResource
An Imprint of HarperCollins Publishers
COVER PHOTO
Vergil between two Muses, early 3rd century A.D., Musee National du Bardo, Tunis,
Tunisia —Giraudon/Art Resource, NY
Wheelock's ™ is a trademark of Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor

The Answer Key for Workbook for Wheelock's Latin, ISBN: 0-06-095989-4, is available
to professors, teachers, and persons engaged in independent study, free of charge. Please
send requests in writing on school letterhead, or with verification of independent study
status, to: HarperCollins Pubhshers, 1000 Keystone Industrial Park, Scranton, PA,
18512-4621.

WORKBOOK FOR wheelock's LATIN. Copyright © 2000, 1997, 1991, 1980 by Paul T.
Comeau and Richard A. LaFleur. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States
of America. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner
whatsoever without written permission except in the case of brief quotations
embodied in critical articles and reviews. For information address HarperCollins
Publishers Inc., 10 East 53rd Street, New York, New York 10022.

HarperCoUins books may be purchased for educational, business, or sales

promotional use. For information, please write to: Special Markets Department,
HarperCollins Publishers Inc., 10 East 53rd Street, New York, New York 10022.

THIRD EDITION, REVISED

ISBN 0-06-095642-9

03 04 05 GCI/RRD 10 9 8
 1

Contents

Editor's Note vii

Preface xi

1 The Alphabet and Pronunciation; Verbs; First and Second

Conjugations: Present Infinitive, Indicative, and
Imperative Active; Translating 1

2 Nouns and Cases; First Declension;

Agreement of Adjectives; Syntax 10

3 Second Declension: Masculine Nouns and Adjectives;

Apposition; Word Order 19
4 Second Declension Neuters; Adjectives; Present Indicative
of Sum; Predicate Nouns and Adjectives; Substantive Adjectives 27
5 First and Second Conjugations:
Future and Imperfect; Adjectives in -er 36
6 Sum: Future and Imperfect Indicative; Possum: Present,
Future, and Imperfect Indicative; Complementary Infinitive 45
7 Third Declension Nouns 52
8 Third Conjugation: Present Infinitive, Present, Future,
and Imperfect Indicative, Imperative 60
9 Demonstratives Hie, Ille, Iste; Special -Tus Adjectives 68
10 Fourth Conjugation and -id Verbs of the Third 76
1 Personal Pronouns Ego, Tu, and Is; Demonstratives Is and Idem 83
12 Perfect Active System of All Verbs 91
13 Reflexive Pronouns and Possessives; Intensive Pronoun 99
14 /-Stem Nouns of the Third Declension;
Ablatives of Means, Accompaniment, and Manner 106
15 Numerals; Genitive of the Whole; Genitive and Ablative
with Cardinal Numerals; Ablative of Time 1 14
vi Contents

16 Third Declension Adjectives 121

17 The Relative Pronoun 129

18 First and Second Conjugations: Passive Voice
of the Present System; Ablative of Agent 136
19 Perfect Passive System of All Verbs;
Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives 144
20 Fourth Declension; Ablatives of Place from Which and Separation 153

21 Third and Fourth Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System 161

22 Fifth Declension; Ablative of Place Where;

Summary of Ablative Uses 169

23 Participles 177
24 Ablative Absolute; Passive Periphrastic; Dative of Agent 187
25 Infinitives; Indirect Statement 196
26 Comparison of Adjectives; Declension of Comparatives;
Ablative of Comparison 205
27 Special and Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 214
28 Subjunctive Mood; Present Subjunctive;
Jussive and Purpose Clauses 223
29 Imperfect Subjunctive; Present and Imperfect
Subjunctive o{ Sum and Possum; Result Clauses 231
30 Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive;
Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses 240
31 Cum Clauses; Fero 250
, 32 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs;
Void, Maid, Nolo; Proviso Clauses 260
33 Conditions 269
34 Deponent Verbs; Ablative with Special Deponents 276
35 Dative with Adjectives; Dative with Special Verbs;
Dative with Compounds 284
36 Jussive Noun Clauses; FTo 292
37 Conjugation of Ed; Constructions of Place and Time 301

38 Relative Clauses of Characteristic; Dative of Reference; Supines 309

39 Gerund and Gerundive 317

40 -Ne, Num, and Nonne in Direct Questions; Fear Clauses;

Genitive and Ablative of Description 326
Editor^s Note

When Wheelock's Latin was first published in 1956, the book was her-
alded for its thoroughness, organization, and concision; one reviewer even
went so far as to predict that become the standard text" for
it '"might well
introducing mature students to elementary Latin. Now, 40 years later, that
prediction has certainly proven accurate. Professor Frederic Wheelock con-
tinued to modify and further improve the text himself until his death in
1987, each new edition meeting with additional plaudits. Then in 1995 I had
the distinct privilege of editing a major substantive revision of the text, the
book's fifth edition, which was intended not to alter the basic concept of the
work but rather to enhance it and make it perhaps even more useful to a
new generation of students.
With the success of "Wheelock's Fifth," it has become my further good
fortune to follow in the steps of Professor Paul Comeau by authoring this

comprehensive revision of his Workbook for Wheelock's Latin, published in

its first edition in 1980. A brief history of the Workbook's conception and
first two editions is presented by Professor Comeau in the Preface following
these remarks. What he does not say there is how remarkably well received

his work was throughout its 15 years in print, right up until the re-
design of Wheelock's Latin in 1995 necessitated its replacement. From its

initial publication, Comeau's Workbook provided the companion to ideal

Wheelock for students at the college level, mature high-school students, and
adults seeking to learn Latin independently. My hope for this new edition
of the Workbook is precisely as it was for the Wheelock text itself: to enhance
the usefulness of an already classic volume for another generation of stu-
dents eager (as the Latin verb studeo so happily implies) to learn, enjoy, and
reap the multiple benefits of Latin, the basic language.
Let me briefly survey the contents of this latest edition and point to
 —

via Editor's Note

some of its new features. As just one means of encouraging a more active
use of the language in the classroom, the old "Objectives," "Grammar,"
"Drill," and "Practice Sentences" sections have been retitled Intellegenda,
Grammatica, Exercitationes, and Lectiones, and a new section, Vis Verborum
("The Power of Words"), has been added. Each chapter begins with a de-
tailed set of objectives, now written as "learner outcomes" and designed to
focus the student's attention immediately on the most important new mate-
rial presented in that chapter. While you should not attempt to complete the
workbook's exercises you have thoroughly studied the corresponding
until
chapter in the text you will find that a preliminary look at the work-
itself,

book lesson will help direct your attention very specifically to what you are
expected to master in the chapter. These Intellegenda are im^mediately fol-
lowed by a brief Latin greeting (again, modestly intended to encourage a
more active use of the language and as a reminder that Latin, hke any other
language, was first and foremost for its native speakers a tool for communi-
cation) and some good advice on the value of memorizing new vocabulary
and paradigms by repeating them aloud. Exploit always all of your language
acquisition skills —
hstening and speaking, as well as reading and writing
in your study of Latin, just as you would in learning a modem language.
The Grammatica section presents a series of questions, in a variety of
formats, designed to focus attention directly upon the newly introduced
grammar. Several items on the Roman alphabet and pronunciation, covering
material presented in the Introduction to Wheelock's Latin, have been in-
cluded in the first lesson, again to underscore the importance of oral/aural
activities in learning the language. The Exercitationes which follow include
transformation drills, word and phrase translations, English-to-Latin sen-
tences, and other exercises designed to sharpen your skills in actively manip-
ulating new and recently introduced material.
The VTs Verborum section presents exercises with synonyms, antonyms,
analogies, and etymologies for the chapter's new vocabulary items, all de-
signed to increase your "Word Power," both in Latin and in English. The
final section of each lesson, the Lectiones ("Readings"), includes two types

of activities. The Latin sentences provide translation practice and systematic

reinforcement of vocabulary from the current and immediately preceding
chapters; the reading comprehension questions, most of them written in
Latin and many requiring responses in Latin, aim to test your understanding
of the reading passages that follow the Sententiae Antiquae in Wheelock's
Latin, while at the same time providing experience in both reading and writ-
ing Latin without resorting to English translation. Finally, each chapter con-
cludes with a memorable quotation or motto, a little something to tuck into
your chest of Latin treasures.
If you find anything of use or of pleasure in this modest companion to

Wheelock's Latin, gentle reader, there are many to be thanked: Professor

 Editor's Note ix

Paul Comeau, most obviously, both for the original idea and masterful exe-
cution of the two earlier, highly successful editions of his Workbook, and
for the very generous support he has given me with this revision; Professor
Wheelock, for giving us all "the classic Latin text," a sine qua non to count-
less thousands of Latin students and their teachers and professors over the

past four decades; Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor, Pro-
fessor Wheelock's daughters, for their tolerance of my editorial meddling
and machinations, indeed for their unflagging support of my work with both
their father's text and Professor Comeau's companion; my editor at Harper-
Colhns, Patricia Leasure, and her assistant Rob Amell, for their expert guid-
ance and keen enthusiasm for both the text and workbook projects; my
graduate assistants, Lakechia Payne-Davis and Joseph Stanfiel, for laboring
in a variety of vineyards essential to this particular harvest; our Classics
Department staff, JoAnn Pulliam, Mary Ricks, and Connie Russell, who
always pay the price, in one way or another, for my "little projects"; my
dean, Dr. Wyatt Anderson, who has firmly encouraged all our Classics De-
partment's endeavors and been a steadfast personal friend; and, lastly, my
dear wife Laura, and our children, Jean-Paul, Caroline, and Kimberley (all

three of whom still pop into the house now and then), who, taking prece-
dence over our five cats and even my trusty IBM computer, are the very
hghts of my life.

Richard A. LaFleur
University of Georgia
Summer, 1996

He studied Latin like the violin, because he liked it.

Robert Frost, "Death of the Hired Man"

Preface

This workbook was first published in 1980 as part of the College Outline
Series and was intended as a companion to the highly respected Wheelock's
Latin, by then in its third edition after its initial publication in 1956. The
book should not perhaps have been the brainchild of a French teacher with
no real credentials in classical languages; and though the venture has en-
joyed a modicum of success over more than 15 years and, I believe, been
well received in the classical teaching community, I have always felt a certain
inadequacy as the author, though always enthusiastic about the endeavor
and fully captivated by it.

My initial contact with Latin, as with many of my generation, came

through the pre- Vatican II Catholic liturgy in a French-speaking parish as
a youngster in the late 1930s. Still vivid are my memories of innumerable
Holy Mass or Vesper services recited or sung in Gregorian chant, with much
of the text not fully understood. My true introduction to classical Latin and
Greek, however, took place on the benches of a typical Quebec boarding
school at Joliette, near Montreal, in the early 1940s, where endless hours
were spent for more than four years (even on Sundays) translating the an-
cient languages to and from French, using four-inch thick dictionaries. It
—
was a true "immersion experience" although, in today's language-teaching
community, that term usually applies more to listening and speaking skills
than to the reading and writing skills that were so paramount in those days
to the teaching of Latin. When left Canada in December. 1944. and was
I

drafted into the U.S. Army only a few weeks later, I truly felt thai my expo-
sure to the classical world had ended.
Little did I know at the time that fate would lead me to earn graduate

degrees in French at Princeton University, to spend six years on the faculty

at the U.S. Air Force Academy, and, upon my reliremenl from the Air Force
xii Preface

in 1975, to qualify for the position of Head of the Foreign Languages De-
partment at New
Mexico State University. One of the first requests made by
my new Dean of Arts and Sciences, just a few days before the beginning of
classes for the 1975-76 academic year, was that I estabhsh a Latin program.
Needless to say, I was not at all sure that I was up to the task. Nevertheless,
my first action was to obtain and consult all the available bibliographies for
Latin textbooks, and then to select several and quickly order examination
copies. After a perusal of the four or five best options, it immediately be-
came evident that none matched the thorough coverage, the efficient and
logical organization, and the clear and concise explanations of Professor
Frederic Wheelock's text, and so "Wheelock's Latin," as everyone called it

in those days, hterally became part of my fife.

Not only did I have to stay ahead of the students, trying to revive gram-
matical principles which had lain dormant for years in my subconscious,
but I also had
accustom myself to comparing Latin words to EngHsh,
to
rather than to French. It was truly amazing, however, that paradigms of
declensions and conjugations drilled into my memory some 35 years earlier
could be successfully recalled. Thus began a new phase of my academic life

with Latin, which lasted from the late 1970s through the 1980s. Within a
few months of beginning my first course, I felt a strong need for some device
to force my students to commit to learning the grammatical elements by
illustrating their newly-acquired knowledge in an ordered, concise format,
complete with practical exercises. Out of that need, the workbook project
was bom.
As I look back, I am delighted that so many students of Latin have
dihgently used and, I hope, benefitted from the first two editions of this

Workbook for Wheelock's Latin. I wish to reiterate my debt of gratitude to

my wife Ruby, to my editors, first at Barnes and Noble and then at Harp-
erCollins, to my many Latin students who patiently suffered through the
loose-leaf phase of the project from 1976 to 1979, to my colleagues who
worked with the preliminary version in their classrooms at the University of
Texas at El Paso and at New Mexico State University, and finally to the staff"

members who typed and proofread the manuscript. I am especially grateful

and indebted to Professor Wheelock. who, though initially reluctant, later
agreed to let his outstanding book be "accompanied." My wife and I had
the unique privilege of spending a few hours at his lovely country home in

New Hampshire as luncheon guests one summer day in 1981, and I often
fondly recall the experience to this day.
I firmly believe that the workbook's existence is now at a crossroads.
Professor Richard A. LaFleur, a scholar of stature and Head of the Depart-
ment of Classics at the University of Georgia, has assumed the task of pro-
ducing this revised and much improved third edition. It will serve as a fit
companion for the recently pubhshed fifth edition of Wheelock's Latin, also
 Preface xiii

revised by Professor LaFleur and the subject of extremely favorable reviews

in the classical language teaching community.
When I retired from active teaching as Professor Emeritus of French, I
felt that my professional life was, for all intents and purposes, at an end,

—
and that the list of my publications mainly in French literature and literary
history — would stand undisturbed. I am deeply grateful to Patricia Leasure,
Executive Editor at HarperCollins, and her assistant Rob Amell for promot-
ing and pursuing this new edition and especially for persuading Professor
LaFleur to accept the role of revision editor. The primary objective was to
make the subject matter of each workbook chapter agree with the new, fifth
edition of Wheelock's Latin, and to integrate its new vocabulary into the
workbook exercises. Professor LaFleur has done so much more, however,
that what had been an adequate work has now become an outstanding one.
The Workbook's new editor has been creative and innovative, improving
nearly every feature, from the new Latin titles for the sections of each chap-
ter to the redefined objectives (the Intellegenda), the recast grammar ques-
tions (Grammatica), the varied types of drills (Exercitdtiones), the more chal-
lenging practice sentences and reading comprehension items (Lectiones), and
the exciting "Word Power" items of the new Vis Verborum sections.
This revised workbook is so improved that it should appeal to the harsh-
est critics, should play a capital role in imparting the knowledge of Latin to
today's students, and should convince its teachers to consider Wheelock's
Latin an attractive, indispensable textbook/workbook package. I consider it

a privilege to have had the opportunity to collaborate with Professor

LaFleur on this new edition, though my personal contribution has been
decidedly meager, and I look forward to the continued resurgence of interest
in Latin among American students that the new Wheelock's Latin is certain
to inspire.

Paul T Comeau
Las Cruces, New Mexico
Summer, 1996

Preface to the Third Edition^ Revised

The third edition of the Workbook has been slightly revised to correct a
few errata in the previous printing and especially to accommodate the new
sixth edition of Wheelock's Latin. For the considerable success of both
books, maximds grdtids, lectores!

Paul Comeau and Richard LaFleur

Workbook for
Wheelock^s Latin
1

The Alphabet and

Pronunciation; Verbs; First
and Second Conjugations:
Present Infinitive^
Indicative^ and Imperative
Active; Translating

INTELLECENDA ^Objectives")

Upon completion of you should be able to

this lesson

1. Discuss the Roman alphabet and the essentials of Latin pronunciation.

2. Define the five principal characteristics of a verb.

3. Explain the difference between the factors which mark the person and
number of an English verb and those which mark a Latin verb.

4. Identify the active voice personal endings of a Latin verb.

5. Form the present stem of a first or second conjugation verb

6. Recognize, form, and translate the present active infinitive, indicative,
and imperative of a first or second conjugation verb.
7. Di.scuss and apply basic rules of word order and translation of simple
Latin sentences.

Name: Section: Date

 .

2 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 1

Salve, discipula or discipule! Whenever you turn to the exercises in this work-
book, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding chap-
ter of your text, Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabu-

lary and even the Latina Est Gaudium section; for this first workbook
chapter you should also review carefully the pages on "The Alphabet and
Pronunciation" in the text's Introduction. And remember always to memo-
rize new paradigms (model conjugations and declensions) as well as vocabu-

lary by repeating the words aloud. Bonam fortunam! {Good luck!)

GRAMMATICA ("Grammar")

1 The Roman alphabet was like ours except that it lacked the let-
ters and 1^, and the letter V originally stood for both the
'

vowel u and the consonant w.

-r
2. Long vowels were generally pronounced about _J as long
as short vowels.

3. Long a was pronounced as in (circle the correct answer)

a. date b. hat c. father d. Dinah

4. Long e was pronounced as in

^they b. knee c. pet d. enough

5. Long i was pronounced as in

a. ice (jy machine c. pin d. Latin

6. Long o was pronounced as in

a. off b. mother c. women d. over

7. Short u was pronounced as in

a. put b. unite c. rude d. rough

8. Which word does not contain a diphthong?

a. saepe b. poena x^^patria d. nauta

9. Which word does not contain a diphthong?

a. huius b. fuit c. cui d. huic

10. B had the sound of _1^ before s and t.

11. cream " the

In the phrase "ice ere word .
'.

illustrates

the sound of Latin c.

I
 Pronunciation; First and Second Conjugations; Translating 3

12. In the phrase "green gemstone," the word ^.^ illus-

trates the sound of Latin g. v

13. When used before a vowel at the beginning of a word Latin i had the
sound of English V .

14. Latin qu was pronounced as in "antique" or "quick"? Oj [a.\ L (S—

15. S was always pronounced as in
(a^ sight b. easy c. aisle d. rise

16. Which illustrates the sound of Latin t?

a. nation b. fraction £Aime d. through

17. The consonant v had the sound of English

18. Ph was pronounced as in "philology" or "uphill"?

'
'^'^V^^ ^

19. A
and
Latin word has as many syllables as it has —
20. Syllabify the following words, underline the long syllables, and mark
the accent (e.g., con-ser-vat).

a. amo -
'^ " ' <
:d b. salvere

c. sententiae j : d. philosophia

e. antlqua f iuvate

21. The person and number of an English verb are determined by

its

22. The person and number of a Latin verb are determined by

its

23. Write the personal endings for the active voice of a Latin verb and
give the English pronoun equivalent to each.

Singular Plural
Latin English Latin English
Ending Pronoun(s) Ending Pronoun(s)

l.i^orlA = 1 i._ =

2 ^ = 2a_ 2
'.

= \^^--^
J J
3. __n__ = W f- r /-V -:
3. _C^!__ = W<A^

Name: Section: Date:

4 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

24. The present active infinitive of the Latin verb which means to praise
is W 1: (It will serve as the model verb for the first
conjugation throughout the course.)

25. The present active infinitive of the Latin verb which means to advise
'^"^ •"
is ^'!
(It will serve as the model for the second
conjugation throughout the course.)

26. The following forms are >'l\'l^\>^'v^t<? of Latin verbs. Identify

the conjugation to which they belong and their English meaning.

Conjugation Meaning(s)

a. videre

b. dare

c. valere

^-^
^
d. cogitare
'/vrc Wna^vI^

e. debere (JLl

f amare

27. The present stem is formed by dropping from

the .

28. Conjugate amo in the present indicative active and provide the three
Enghsh translations for each form.

Latin English English English

Translation 1 Translation 2 Translation 3

Singular
i 1 J^ \. CA^yf^T'

1 TaWNQ

Plural

2. 'w'-'V

3
 Pronunciation; First and Second Conjugations; Translating 5

29. Conjugate debe5 in the present indicative active and provide the three
English translations for each form.

Latin English English English

Translation 1 Translation 2 Translation 3

Singular

Plural
-^ f^^^^
1

30. The model, pattern, or example forms for the words of an inflected
language are called

31, Vowels that are normally long are usually shortened when they occur
before another or before the consonants , ,

or at the end of a word, or before or in any position.

32. The singular imperative of a first or second conjugation verb is

identical to the verb's ; for the plural

imperative, simply add to this form the ending

33. Provide the infinitive, the present stem, and the singular and plural
imperatives for the following verbs.

Imperatives
Infinitive Stem Singular Plural
.1 -
a. erro

b. salved JC
c. servo

d. terreo ^r fUi<L
e. valeo M 7U^, \i^^_L

f voc5 fOLU \^0Ca<i^

34. Before attempting to translate a Latin sentence, you should always
read it ("/> \IUN.A. from beginning to end.

Name: Section: Dale:

r
6 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

35. The mnemonic device SOV reminds you that the NJ^Np
MvA ^-> often
appears last in a Latin sentence.

EXERCITATIONES C'Exercises")

A. Fill in the following blanks with the information requested.

Person Number Tense Mood Voice Translation

1. videte ^

2. da
^-/
-" "^ '-^
3. cogitate '-^^

4. vide ^ V
B. Fill in the blanks for each verb.

Person Number Tense Mood Voice Translation

1. vocat

2. cogitamus

3. amant

4. debes
''
5. videt -f

6. vident _^_^ ^

7. debemus

8. datis ".
.

C. Make the single transformation indicated and translate the new form
(e.g., amat to plural: answer, amant, they love).

Transformation Translation

1. amamus, to sg

2. vocant, to 1st pers.

3. videtis, to sg.

4. cogito, to 3rd pers.

5. terret, to pi. . —-I

 Pronunciation; First and Second Conjugations; Translating 7

6. conserva, to plural

7. videte, to singular

D. Supply the correct present active indicative form of the verb in paren-
theses, and translate.

1. Saepe (errare; 2nd pers. pi.).

I

w
2. nihil (videre; 1st pers. pi.).

3. i i m me (amare; 3rd pers. sg.).

4. Quid (videre; 2nd pers. pi.)?

5. Voca me sT (errare; 3rd pers. pi.).

6 nihil (dare; ?nd per<; pi )

7. Quid "^^^ (servare; 1st pers. pi.)?

8. Me saepe (terrere; 3rd pers. sg.).

9. Me nnn (amare; 3rd pers. pi.).

10. Mone me sT nihil (videre; 2nd pers. sg.).

E. Translate into Latin; remember to employ the standard word order

learned thus far and to include all macrons.

1 . Nothing frightens me.

2. They are saving nothing.

Name: Section: Date:

^
8 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

3. What must we preserve? i

S'> 'r /9 nr
'

4. Advise me often, please.

» t,

V/5 VERBORUM C'Word Power'')

Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your
knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. To "annihilate" something is essentially to turn it

''
into V ;,'" .-
.

2. An "amatory" poem deals with \'!>^C

3. Enter in the "debit" column the amount you ,

4. To "admonish" someone is to give him a steni ^Ai^i£_^dJ_^

5. A "valid" argument has the (^^^^^ ^ to persuade.

B. Which English word is not related to the Latin verb? (Use a good En-
ghsh dictionary, if necessary, to answer these.)

1. terreo: a. territory b. terrify c. terrible d. terrorize

2. valeo: a. prevail b. valiant c. veil d. invalid

3. amo: a. amiable b. aimless c. amateur d. amorous

4. erro: a. erratic b. erroneous c. errant cf. erudite

LECTIONES (''Readings'')

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. Me monent, sT erro. '^^' '

* -^""^^ x \l

2. Me monet, sT errant. '

 .

Pronunciation; First and Second Conjugations; Translating 9

3. Monete me, sT errat.

4. Debes monere me. _

5. Me terrere non debetis. '^J*^-^ C^' Jg A.

6. Non debent laudare me.

'

7. "Quid dat?" "Nihil saepe dat." j .V- ^ y-'f '. :

^ -^ ^ ^ -}^^*

8. Me saepe vocant et monent. j^^ i^^j^

^

9. Nihil video. Quid vides?

10. Me lauda, sT non erro, amabo te.

11. ST valetis, valemus. :

12. ST valet, valeo. :

13. ST me amat, me laudare debet. __: %< ••

.
- .v^C ^''

14. Non debes errare. >> ^'^ ^ ^

"? t^TVl f
15. Quid debemus laudare? V
•'

16. Salvete, discipulT!

Answer these questions on "The Poet Horace Contemplates an Invi-

tation."

1 The author's mood is best described as

a. confident b. frightened c. unsure d. angry

2. Which verb has the most negative connotations?

a. vocant b. monent c.jculpant d. laudant

Cogito ergo sum: / think, therefore I exist

Descartes

Name: Section: Date:

2
Nouns and Cases; First
Declension; Agreement of
Adjectives; Syntax

INTELLEGENDA (''Objectives")

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Name the cases of a Latin noun and identify the basic uses or gram-
matical functions of each case in a sentence.
2. Form the base of any noun.
3. Recognize, form, and translate first declension nouns and adjectives.
4. Explain what is meant by noun and adjective gender
5. State the rules for adjectivelnoun agreement and verblsubject
agreement.
6. Describe the usual positioning of an adjective.
7. Define the terms "declension" and "syntax''

Salvete, discipulae et discipuIT! Remember: whenever you turn to the exer-

cises in this workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the cor-
responding chapter of your text, Wheelock's Latin, especially the new gram-

mar and vocabulary and even the Latina Est Gaudium section. And
remember always to memorize new paradigms (model declensions and con-
jugations) and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Bonam fortunam!
{Good luck!)
 1

Nouns and Cases; First Declension; Agreement of Adjectives; Syntax 1

GRAMMATICA ("Grammar")

1. The several inflected forms of a Latin noun or adjective are

called Cjy^^^

2. Name the Latin cases used for the following grammatical functions.

a. Direct object of a verb

b. Possession

c. Subject of a verb

d. Means

e. Direct address

f. Agent

g. Indirect object of a verb

h. Manner

i. Accompaniment

j. Place

k. Time

1. Object of a preposition (two cases) and

While the listing of all the forms of a verb is called a "conjugation,'

the listing of a noun s cases is called a

A noun is declined by adding the case endings to the

which is found by dropping the ending of the case
provided in the vocabulary list.

Give the base oi the following nouns from this chapter "s vocabulary.

a. fama. famae b. fortuna, fortunae

c. patria, patriae d. Ira. Trae

Equivalents of the articles "a," "an," and "the" do not exist in Latin
and so must be supplied when translating into English.
TRUE/FALSE (underline one).

Name: Section: Date:

12 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 2

7. Provide the information requested for each first declension ending.

Case Number Function English

Preposition(s)
(if any)

a. -as /\0L ^\ _S1D_

b. -a voc.

c. -am ALL Sj ^D_

d. -ae dat. ^. X.O
5\ 5 y
e.

f.-a
-a

g. -IS
m
nom.

^^
abl.
^
n
h. -ae gem

i. -ae nom. Pi 5, A-

J. -is
dat. - 91 JIQ ^/far
k. -arum (T?</n _£l 'QlVil'iMA OF
voc.

8. The gender of most first declension nouns is \ fytK(tJjP_

9. Which noun is feminine gender?

a. agricola b. nauta c. poeta /cQpatria

10. Identify the base of vita, vTtae, and decline it fully, spelhng out the
case names, and providing the English meanings appropriate to each
case.

base:
viV
Singular
Case Latin English

vita life

vTtae
 Nouns and Cases; First Declension; Agreement of Adjectives; Syntax 13

Plural
Case Latin English

1 1 . Fill in the following blanks with the information requested for each
nr«iin
noun.

Translation Use

a. formam

b. fama (nom. sg.) Wm g. ^

c. fortunas -fev WAf\jL. \)0_

d. Trae (nom. pi.) CaY^^ACY' ^-5

- philosophiae(dat.sg.) t7n|\(:)^0|9PM -^ ^
f puellTs (abl. pi.) <>) 1
f ^ A^f/^'
g. vTtae (gen. sg.) W ' d V}t)6^s'<^/'C^

h. poenarum Otl^ \\rUf ^oSS/5<V^

i. patrils (dat. pi.) -WHy^tr- ] (X<r>a J^O
12. An must agree with the noun it modifies in i \VA*^ Jv^
adjective
(^^Mjr^^MT, and C-^^S^ a verb must agree with its subject
;

in y^.^^0^ and AMyV^bg.r

13. The term for the grammatical function and interconnection of the
words in a sentence is 6'vAr\YC>A

Name: —— Section: Date:

14 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 2

EXERCITATIONES ^Exercises")

A. Supply the correct form of the words shown in parentheses in the nomi-
native case, and translate.

1
O^tV^v.
"^ ^-^ (poeta) non cogitat.
.
Y

2. Date nautae Y)^ ^\AV\V CA\r^ (pecunia).

3. Sine \ ^ 0^ (Ira) monet.

4.
"
HtK^^fN^ (nauta) ^PO j)^^ (poena; pi.) dant.

5. Amatis ^/\Vc^^^^> (vita; sg.) et W^^f^H<^ (fama).

6. Est sine liWAjXTvK ^.M>JfV\\N (multa pecunia; sg.)-

7. iDOiM\tK(fortuna) saepe vocat.

8. T-VYf^AtA.CA^ ^VVvWot^'twr^tphilrtsnphia antlqua; Sg.) laudo.

9. Conservant philosophiam tuam "^ N ^^^ . (vita; gen.).

10. Forma <)OY^^VAAf^ (porta; gen. pi.) est antlqua.

11. lPvM>\i^^ i^kJi (puella mea; pi.) rosas dare debetis.

 Nouns and Cases; First Declension; Agreement of Adjectives; Syntax 15

B. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 . multa philosophia /A^VU ^U'.l oSiyl^i^ii rfyiDVTC ^h la^of^ ^b

2. sententiTs mels (abl.)

3. Nauta errat.

4. Puella nautam servat.

5. patriarum antlquarum

C. Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (-e.g., puella fortuna > fortuna puellae, the
girl's fortune).

Transformation Translation

1 . fama patria

2. rosa forma

3. sententia puella

4. Ira poeta

5. nauta pecunia

D. Translate into Latin; remember to employ the standard word order

learned thus far and to include all macrons.

1. Without philosophy the country often errs and is not strong.

2. Your country is great.

3. The sailors are saving much money.

4. The girl is giving the poet's rose to the sailor.

v^fjuV fey- nfKjjQro.?, tosos^jA Nooe/W ^

}

Name: Section: Dale:

16 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 2

Vis VERBORUM ("Word Power")

A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary Ust.

1. Fama gives us Enghsh "fame"; Ust four other first declension

words from the chapters vocabulary list that also have English
derivatives in which the Latin -a has become English "-e":

2. The suffix -osa, meaning /w// of or characterized by, gives us, from
fama, the Latin adjective famdsa, which means yamowj^; similarly,
from forma, beauty, we have the Latin adjective ,

which essentially means

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory" speech is full
of praise").

1. An "irascible" person is prone to

2. A is expert in "nautical" matters.

3. If you are "impecunious" you have no

4. Something that is "vital" is hterally essential to

5. An "expatriate" fives outside his or her

LECTIONES ("Readings")

A. First read each sentence aloud twice; then translate as fiterally as pos-
sible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. Vale, patria mea.

Afoo^Wy, ^ JV^A (1POO^-

)rtuna puellae est magna.

Forttina

Puella fortunam patriae tuae laudat.

4. O puefia. patriam tuam serva. amabo te!

0^ <^r\^ ^QoJ^ UyxM' ^^O^'^CVVA^ x^ Awu^jt^
 .

Nouns and Cases; First Declension; Agreement of Adjectives; Syntax 17

5. Salvete, nautae!

(jirgjferf^cA^s ,<^;\o^^^>
6. Puellae nihil datis.

7. Rosas puellae videt. W->C^i H«f. TT3665* f??-V^ t?^'*^

8. Pecuniam puellarum non vides.

umxk. ctorM)\- 5^/.V^^<. \r(U)r\tAy^ dP^H^ <i\Vlr

9. Monere nautas debemus.

^/vj C ^lrw^^Ul vjcAr/^ r^e -^c^l i-^rr

10. Vita multis puellis lortunam dat.

1 1 VTtam meam pecunia tua conservas.

^a^na est nihil sine fortuna.

-WvW^ \5 ng-^WVr^ ^\Y^ayj^V -^V^TUfyjU

line fama et fortuna patria non valet.

14. Iram puellarum laudare non debes

15. VTtam sine poenls amamus.

16. Sine philosophia non valemus.

17. Quid est vita sine philosophia?

NHWy \S
18. Vita non valet, si saepe erras.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

18 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 2

19. Ira sententiae tuae me terret.

B. Answer these questions on "Catullus Bids His Girlfriend Farewell."

1 What does the poet suggest he will do at the girl's departure?

a. be tough b. love her c. praise her beauty d. send flowers

2. The emotional shift from the beginning of the passage to the end
is from
a. happy to sad b. joyful to unhappy
c. angry to calm d. firm to wavering

Fortes fortune iuvat: Fortune helps the brave

Terence
 3
Second Declension:
Masculine Nouns and
Adjectives; Apposition;
Word Order

INTELLEGENDA ^Objectives")

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize, form, and translate second declension masculine nouns and
adjectives.

2. Define the term "apposition" and state the rule for agreement of two
words in apposition.

3. Discuss and apply basic rules of Latin word order

Salvete, amlcae et amIcT! Remember: whenever you turn to the exercises in

this workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the correspond-
ing chapter of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary
and even the Latlna Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memo-
rize new paradigms (model declensions and conjugations) and vocabulary

by repeating the words aloud. Bonam fortunam!

Name: Section: Date:

20 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 3

GRAMMATICA ("Grammar")

1. The gender of second declension nouns is either "'^-^^^^^^'^^

or (\t^^yCC^^ and the genitive singular always ends with the
,

letter _A_.

2. Besides >ir, the nominative singular of all second declension mascu-

lines ends with the two letters VA^ or ^Lrr

3. Give the base of the following -er nouns and a derivative whose spell-
ing reflects the base.

Base Derivative

a.

b.
ager

puer
\^
^
-^ vA(jr\W

4. Only the ckwV

and A\o\ plural endings of the
second declension are identical to those of the first.

Give the indicated information for each of the following second

declension masculine case endings.

Case Number Function English

Preposition(s)
(if any)

a. -0 abl. i^ jp
b. -um Kc-- 4^ t)D

c. -6 dat.
^ Xo \d f^<-
d. -T voc.
^ 0|\

e. -orum .^m. _^ aSl

f -us

g- -OS

h. -T(sg.)

i. -e

abl.
J. -IS

k. -T pom.

-IS dat.
 Second Declension: Masculine Nouns and Adjectives; Apposition; Word Order 21

6. and decline it fully, spelling out

Identify the base of numerus, numerl,
the case names, and providing the English meanings appropriate to
each case.

base: A^ Vt\<g-\r

Singular
Case Latin English

numerus the number

numerl

Plural
Case Latin English

7. Nouns in apposition always agree in

a. number b. gender (^case d. all three

8. Word order is crucial to meaning in

^^^T^nglish b. Latin c. neither d. both

9. Assign numbers 1-5 to the following to show the typical order of

words in a simple Latin sentence or clause.

Subject and its modifiers

^ Verb
"-[
Adverbial words or phrases

3 Direct object

1 Indirect object

Name: Section: Dale

 .

22 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 3

10. The typical order listed above reflects the Roman fondness for a style
indicating
a. suspense b. variety c. confusion d. all three

1 1 Give the indicated information for each of the following.

Case Function Translation

a. f niorum meorum
b. f rliabus mels §bL

c. popull Roman! E^IL

d. populo Romano dat.

e. viiTs Romanls §bL

f virT magnl nonL

g. amicorum paucorum

h. amIcTs meTs dat.

i. amIcT Roman! vo^-

j. magnum virum
k. puer meus

1. multos agros

m. magn! numeri (sg.)

n. am!ce magne

EXERCI TA TIONES CExercises ")

A. Supply the correct form of the words shown in parentheses in the nomi-
native case, and translate.

1 . ^VmW^, ^wH/m\Mymuita saplentla) semper habemus.

2. Numerus f(^vCiOf\A^ "t^AKAi^IN (am!cus tuus; pi.) est magnus.

ij
 .

Second Declension: Masculine Nouns and Adjectives; Apposition; Word Order 23

3. Agricola\'Mt \^ r*CA j (filius meus; pi.) sapientiam dat.

4. PaucI puerT A>^A\ArLW\^ f\^f-<^yf\yJ^rr- (numerus magnus; sg.)

^^"^O^^ff^ i^(xu^if\ (vir magnus; gen. pi.) vident.

(magna sapientia; gen. sg.). ,

(U\\ -Vy w\tv\ j^ y^ckV vJ\^dory\

^ B. Translate into Latin; remember to employ standard word order and to
include all macrons.

1. The reputation of the m^n and women is great, my friend.

'c\/^\r\A/r{Ar\r\ /^rV i^ruv*JV^^)

2. The people give much money to the sons of Romans.

3. Mv friend's son sees the girl.

4. We often praise the boy's friends. S^'^^^T^

5. Many men today d o not love the wisdom of ancient pnilosophy.

^^sr\ <:xw\c^v\V

C. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 O, mel amlcT

2. in agrls

3. sine puero

4. Puer rosam videt.

5. virorum avarorum

Name: Section: Date:

24 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 3

D. Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (e.g., puer amicus > amicus puerl, the
boy's friend).

Transformation Translation

1 . vir patria

2. poena amicus

3. sententia populus

4. agricola ager

5. filia fortuna

V75 VERBORUM C'Word Power")

A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1. Since the Latin root col- means to cultivate, an agricola is hterally

a person who
2. If "innumerable" means "not able to be numbered or counted,"
then "insatiable" means "not able to be ."

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1. An "amicable" person easily attracts

2. "Filial" devotion is that of a or to a

parent.

3. The man's "puerile" behavior made him look like a

4. His "paucity" of resources meant that he had

things to work with.
 .

Second Declension: Masculine Nouns and Adjectives; Apposition; Word Order 25

LECTIONES C'Readings")

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Vale, ml amice.

O vir magne, populum Romanum serva!

ST nihil me satiat, saepe erro.

\C vstW^^o, ^\is^\ ff^.^X a^if\ ur^r

4. Nautae fHiabus mels nihil dant.

'X^l 6tx\;o^s yoi. JAa r[(MxeMi1^S /luJ^hhp

5. Agricolas in agro video.

6. Amlcum f iliT me! hodie vides.

7. Puellae et puerT formam rosarum amant.

8. Non debes filias et fllios tuos terrere.

)ebent amlcam tuam laudare.

^

/Tta paucTs virls f amam dat, ml f TIT.

1 1 Viri magnl paucds amlcos saepe habent.

12. Amicus meus de philosophia semper cogitat.

A/ame. Section: Dale.

26 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 3

13. FTli^s magnl viri non semper est magni^ vir.

14. Quid vir avarus de pecuniacogitat?

15. Philosophiam, sapientiam magnorum virorum, laudare debetis.

B. Answer these questions on "The Grass Is Always Greener."

1 . Quid agricola laudat? (Responde Latine, Respond in Latin, i.e.

with a complete Latin sentence.)

2. Quid nautae saepe laudant? (Responde Latine.)

3. Quid virT avarl habent?

4. What one vice does Horace suggest causes men to envy

others?

Dux femina fact!: A woman (was) leader of the enterprise

Vergil
4
Second Declension Neuters;
Adjectives; Present
Indicative of Sum; Predicate
Nouns and Adjectives;
Substantive Adjectives

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize, form, and translate second declension neuter nouns and ad-
jectives.

2. Recognize, conjugate, and translate the irregular verb sum in the pres-
ent indicative.
3. Define the terms "predicate noun" and "predicate adjective" and state
the rule for agreement of a predicate adjective with the subject.

4. Define the term "substantive adjective" and recognize and translate

such an adjective in a Latin sentence.

Salvete, amlcae et amlcf. Whenever you turn to the exercises in this work-
book, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding chap-
ter of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary and
even the LatTna Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memorize

Name: Section: Date:

 .

28 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 4

new paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Bonam for-
tunam!

GRAMMATICA
1 The gender of second declension nouns is either
or , and the genitive singular always ends with the
letter

2. The nominative singular of all second declension neuters ends with

the two letters

3. Give the base of the following nouns and adjectives.

a. consilium b. cura

c. magister d. perlculum

e. bonus, -a, -um f verus, -a, -um

4. Which of the following nouns is feminine?

a. basia b. dona c. mora d. all three

5. For all neuter nouns and adjectives, the

and cases are identical to one another.

Fill in the following blanks with the information requested for each
second declension neuter ending.

Case Ni imber Function English

Preposition(s)
(if any)

a. -orum

b. -T

c. -um ace.

d. -Is abl.

e. -0 abl.

f -um nom.

g. -a ace.

.=1

h. -Is dat.

i
 Second Declension Neuters; Adjectives; Present Indicative of Sum; Predicate Nouns and Adjectives 29

1. -O dat.

j-a nom.

Identify the base oi officium bonum, good service, decline it fully, and
provide the English meanings appropriate to each case.

base:

Singular
Latin English

Nom. officium bonum the good service

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Voc.

Plural
Latin English

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Voc.

8. Fill in the following blanks with the information requested for each
noun.

Translation Function

a. donorum

b. consiliT

c. otio

d. perTculTs

e. bella

Name: Section: Date:

30 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 4

Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. ager (small)

b. exitil (much) ^\/^-\V'

c. bellorum (evil) ^(aVusTvAatA

d. remedia (few) ^QvAAO^
e. oculos (pretty) Vie,AW
10. The important irregular verb sum is

a. transitive b. linking c. active d. passive

11. The personal endings of esse in the present indicative, when com-
pared with the standard active voice personal endings in Latin, are
a. identical b. different c. irregular d. none of these

12. As an intransitive linking verb, sum connects its subject with a

a. direct object b. indirect object
c. predicate noun or adjective d. possessive

13. Translate the following.

a. sumus b. estis

c. sunt d. est

e. sum f es

14. A predicate adjective agrees with its subject in

a. number b. gender c. case d. all these

15. When employed as a substantive, an adjective is used in place of a

a. subject b. noun c. adverb d. direct object

16. Identify the number, gender, case, and grammatical use of

these nouns in this chapter's Practice and Review sentences
(e.g., Otium [sentence 1], singular, neuter, nominative, subject).

Number Gender Case Use

a. Bella (2)

b. perlcula (2)

c. otio (3)

d. poeta (7)

e. amicT (7)
 .

Second Declension Neuters; Adjectives; Present Indicative of Sum; Predicate Nouns and Adjectives 31

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate each of the following into Latin or English; remember to in-

clude all macrons.

1 real danger (subject)

2. otium magnum
3. bella mala

4. dona bella

5. of a foolish plan

6. remedil verT

7. for great leisure

8. an evil war (direct object)

9. by beautiful gifts

10. multa basia

11. of small services

12. multo exitio

B. Supply the correct forms of the words shown in parentheses in the nom-
inative case and translate. .

1 . ^^^^—z (perlculum) hodie sunt 1

/6^
(verus, -a, -um).

2. Perlculum fe(^\\ (bellum; gen.) \ri(u/-w^\fV\

(parvus, -a, -um) est.

3. Puer et puella non sunt (r^^^\ (avarus, -a, -um).

4. Officium et otium saepe sunt ylOsT^O^ (bonus, -a. -um).

5. Mult! de ^X\V>
^>^^ o
m^ (exitium) patriae cogitant.

Name: Section Date:

 .

32 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 4

C. Translate into Latin; remember to employ the standard word order

learned thus far and to include all macrons.

1 . War is often foolish and not humane.

2. Peace is not always good.

3. The teacher loves the old gifts.

4. Your eyes are pretty.

5. The danger of delay is real.

D. Make the single transformation indicated and translate the new form
(e.g., dondrum to ablative: answer, ddnls, by/with/from the gifts).

Transformation Translation

1. poetas, to singular

2. populum, to nominative

3. agricolae, to singular

4. cdnsiha, to dative

5. exitia, to singular

E. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 puerorum Romanorum

2. parvTs donis (abl.)

3. oculum tuum

4. officium meum
5. femina bona

i
 Second Declension Neuters; Adjectives; Present Indicative of Sum; Predicate Nouns and Adjectives 33

F. Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (e.g., puella fortuna > fortuna puellae, the
girl's fortune).

Transformation Translation

1 . amlca consilium

2. magistra cura

3. officium magister

4. fama vir

5. fflius sententia

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary Hst.

1 . Since the Latin prefix neg- means the absence of, the noun
negotium, business, is literally the of

2. If formosus, -a, -um, from forma, beauty, means /«// of or charac-

terized by beauty, then the Latin adjective from
periculum, means /w// of or characterized by

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory" speech is full
of praise ").

1. A museum "curator" hterally takes C^v JL of its collection.

2. To "embellish" a decoration is to make it even more

3. A "stultifying" experience makes one feel

4. An "adjutant's" role is to provide

C. Which English word is not related to the Latin noun or adjective?

(Use a good English dictionary, if necessary, to answer these.)

1. bellus, -a, -um: a. belle b. bellicose c. beauty d. belladonna

2. oculus: a. monocle b. binoculars c. oculist d. occult

3. periculum: a. puerile b. perilous c. imperil d. peril

Name: Section: Date:

34 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 4

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Mora saepe est remedium belli, O Roman!!

2. PaucI verum otium hodie habent.

3. Da parvum basium ftliae bellae tuae, ml amice!

4. Quid de me et exitio patriae meae cogitas?

5. Porta antlqua non est magna sed bella est.

6. Ocull puellae sunt belli.

7. Et forma et numerus rosarum feminam satiant.

8. Multa bella otium non conservant.

9. Et otium perTcula saepe habet.

10. Stultus vir mala belli laudat.

1 1 . Officio curam sine mora dare debemus.

12. SI consihum bonum non habes, in magno perlculo sumus.

 .

Second Declension Neuters; Adjectives; Present Indicative of Sum; Predicate Nouns and Adjectives 35

13. VTtae magnorum non sunt sine multls perlculTs.

14. Oflficia magistrae sunt multa et magna.

15. Vir parvi otii es.

B. Answer these questions on "The Rarity of Friendship."

1 Quid paucT habent?

a. pecuniam b. ver5s amlcos c. dignl d. stultl

2. ST habemus, valere possumus.

a. pecuniam b. omnia c. nihil d. amlcitiam

3. Translate into English the title of Cicero's essay from which this
reading passage has been adapted:

Perlculum in mora: ( There is) danger in delay

Livy

Name: Section: Dale:

5
First and Second
Conjugations: Future and
Imperfect; Adjectives in -er

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Identify the future and imperfect tense signs for first and second conju-
gation verbs.
2. Recognize, form, and translate the future and imperfect active indica-
tive of a first or second conjugation verb.

3. Recognize and form first/second declension adjectives with masculine

nominatives in -er.

Salvete, amlcae et amici! Whenever you turn to the exercises in this work-
book, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding chap-
ter of Wlieelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary and
even the Latina Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memorize
paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Habete animos
magnds!
 First and Second Conjugations: Future and Imperfect; Adjectives in -er 37

GRAMMATICA

1. The present stem of a first or second conjugation verb is found by

dropping from the principal part.

2. In most forms of the future active indicative of first and second conju-
gation verbs, the future tense sign is ; the tense sign for
the imperfect is

3. The personal endings (plus tense signs) for the present, future, and
imperfect active indicative are:

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Imperfect
Singular Plural

'

Both the future and imperfect tenses are composed of three elements
in the followinp order-
and

5. Conjugate amo, amare, in the present, future, and imperfect active

indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Name: Section: Date:

38 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 5

Imperfect
Singular Plural

6. Translate the preceding future and imperfect active indicative forms

of amo, amare, to love.

Future Imperfect
Singular Plural Singular Plural

7. The imperfect tense can indicate an action in the past that was
a. continuous b. repeated c. habitual d. all these

8. To identify the base of an -er adjective, you should memorize the

a. masculine nominative b. feminine or neuter nominative
c. case endings d. all these

9. Decline the following adjectives.

Singular

Nom. ITber libera iTberum noster nostra nostrum

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.
 First and Second Conjugations: Future and Imperfect; Adjectives in -er 39

10. Identify the base of caelum pulchrum, beautiful sky, decline it fully,

and provide the English meanings appropriate to each case.

base:

Singular
Latin English

Nom. caelum pulchrum the beautiful sky

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Voc.

Plural
Latin English

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Voc.

1 1. Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. adulescentiam (healthy)

b. animum (free)

c. culparum (our)

Name: Section: Dare:

40 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 5

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1. culpabimus

2. remanebat

3. videbunt

4. superabimus

5. cenabam

6. I shall help

7. you (pi.) will have

8. she used to err

9. we shall give

10. they were satisfying

B. Supply the correct forms of the words shown in parentheses and

translate.

1. Semper (superare; 1st pers. pi. impf ) pericula.

2. Sapientifl satis _ (valere; fut.).

3. Saepe (dare; 2nd pers. pi. impf) gloriam amico.

4. Tum culpa nostra non (remanere; fiit )

5. Puella et puer eras (errare; fut.).

6. Magistros her! _ (videre; 1st pers. sg. impf).

1
 . 1

First and Second Conjugations: Future and Imperfect; Adjectives in -er 4

7. Quando (cogitare; 2nd pers. sg. fut.) de

philosophia?

8. Propter bellum, igitur, te (superare; 1st pers.

sg. impf).

C. Make the transformation(s) indicated and translate the new form

(e.g., rosam amat, to plural: answer, rosas amant, they love roses).

Transformation Translation

1 amlcT nostrT, to sg. .

2. ager pulcher, to ace.

3. agricolam monet, to pi.

4. me laudat, to impf.

5. verba mala, to abl.

D. Identify the verb tense and translate.

Tense Translation

1. conservabit

2. terrebas

3. debent

4. vocabatis

5. sumus

E. Translate into Latin; remember to employ the standard word order

learned thus far and to include all macrons.

1 . Therefore, the Roman people used to praise our good plans.

2. Then they will save few free men in our country.

3. The farmer's roses are often small but alwavs beautiful.

4. The sailor kept giving many gifts and kisses to the woman.

Name: Section: Date:

 . .

42 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 5

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary hst.

1 Which adjective does not have a related meaning?

a. meus b. noster c. stultus d. tuus

2. Which adverb does not have a related meaning?

a. hodie b. satis c. semper d. turn

3. Which noun is nearly synonymous with gl5ria?

a. animus b. culpa c. fama d. remedium

4. Which verb is an antonym of culpo?

a. ceno b. laudo c. maneo d. sum
5. Which is not interrogative?
a. -ne b. quando c. quid d. propter

B. Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1 An "animated" cheerleader has a lot of school

2. To "exculpate" a defendant is to free him from

If an "insatiable" appetite is one that cannot be satisfied, then an

"insuperable" difficulty is one that

To "procrastinate" is to move some action forward

to

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as Uterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 Laudabuntne, igitur, famam filiarum et filiorum nostrorum?

2. LlberT magnum numerum officiorum semper habebunt.

 .

First and Second Conjugations: Future and Imperfect; Adjectives in -er 43

3. ST oculT tuT hodie sunt sanl, bellos agros meos sine mora videre
debes.

4. MultT in pulchra patria nostra magnum otium el paucas curas

habebant.

5. Propter exitium patriae, poenam avarorum tum laudabant.

6. Salve, arnica mea! Quando cenabimus?

7. Magistra nostra me laudat et te saepe laudabit.

8. Multas culpas humanas habemus et semper habebimus.

9. ST Tram tuam superabis, te superabis.

10. Habetne animus tuus satis sapientiae?

B. Answer these questions on "His Only Guest" and "Thermopylae."

1 If the boar is, so to speak, Caecilianus' dinner-guest, then who is

the real pig?

a. Titus b. Caecilianus c. Martial d. none of these

2. Quid Lacedaemonil in caelo videbunt?

a. exercitus b. Persicus c. sagittae d. all these

3. Quando Lacedaemonil fortasse cenabunt?

a. cum animls b. hodie c. saepe d. apud umbras

Name: Section: Date:

44 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 5

4. The humorous point depends on the two very different meanings

of which one word?
a. video b. caelum c. umbra d. animus

Mens Sana in corpore sano: A healthy mind in a healthy body

Juvenal

\
6
Sum: Future and Imperfect
Indicative; Possum:
Present^ Future^ and
Imperfect Indicative;
Complementary Infinitive

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize and translate sum, esse, in the future and imperfect indic-
ative.

2. Recognize and translate possum, posse, in the present, future, and im-
perfect indicative.
3. Define, recognize, and translate a "complementary infinitive."

Whenever you turn to the exercises in this

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque!
workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding
chapter of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary
and even the Latlna Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memo-
rize paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. ST Latlnam

semper amabitis, multam fortunam bonam habere poteritis!

Name: Section: Date:

46 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 6

GRAMMATICA
1. The personal endings for the present, future, and imperfect tenses of
both sum and possum are the same as those already learned for regu-
lar verbs. T/F

2. The stem of sum in the future and imperfect tenses is

3. The Latin verb meaning to be able or can is a compound of the

stem meaning able, capable, and the irregular
,

verb

4. In conjugating the verb possum, pot- becomes pos- before forms of

sum, esse, beginning with the letter

5. A complementary infinitive is so called because it the

meaning of another verb.

6. Which cannot take a complementary infinitive?

a. ceno b. possum c. debeo d. none of these

7. A complementary infinitive has a subject separate from that of the

verb whose meaning it completes. T/F

8. List, giving the sentence number, all the complementary infinitives in

the Latin Practice and Review sentences of Chapter 6.

9. Conjugate esse in the active indicative tenses indicated.

Present Future Imperfect

Latin English Latin English Latin English

Singular

Plural

3
 Sum: Future and Imperfect Indicative; Possum: Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative 47

10. Conjugate posse in the active tenses indicated.

Present Future Imperfect

Latin English Latin English Latin English

Singular

Plural

2.

3.

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1. erat 2. we shall be able to

3. poterit 4. I can

5. poteramus '.

6. you were able to

7. ero 8. he will be

9. poterunt 10. we were

B. Supply the correct forms of the words shown in parentheses and

translate.

1. Multl librT Graecorum (esse; impf ) perpetuT.

2. Liber vester (esse; fut.) magnus.

3. LibrT nostri (esse; pres.) verl.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

48 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 6

4. Non (posse; 1st pers. pi. pres.) tolerare vitia

tyrannorum.

5. Non (posse; 1st pers. pi. fut.) tolerare libros malos.

6. Non (debere; 1st pers. pi. pres.) tolerare vestras culpas.

7. Ubi (posse; 2nd pers. sg. impf.) superare

tyrannos? Ibi.

C. Make only the transformations indicated and translate the new form
(e.g., amabit, to 2nd person plural: answer, amabitis, you will love).

Transformation Translation

1. potest, to pi. impf

2. erunt, to 1st pers. sg.

3. poteramus, to pres. sg.

4. es, to pi. fut.

D. Change the verb to a complementary infinitive with a form of possum

in the same tense as the original verb, and then translate the new sen-
tence (e.g., Periculmn superabat: answer, PerTculmn superare poterat, He
was able to overcome the danger).

1 Tyrannum avarum nunc non tolerat.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Discipulae vestrae, igitur, eras ibi remanebunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

Videsne libros discipulorum bonorum?

Transformation:

Translation:
 . .

Sum: Future and Imperfect Indicative; Possum: Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative 49

4. insidias vitiaque tyrannl turn superabamus.

Transformation:

Translation:

E. Translate into Latin; remember to employ the standard word order

learned thus far and to include all macrons.

1 . The glory of the Greek and (use -que) Roman gods was perpetual

2. Teachers, are your students able to be safe now?

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 The suffix -osus, -a, -um, meaning /«// of or characterized by, gives
us the Latin adjective famdsus, -a, -um, which is formed on the
base of fama and famous (which also happens to be an En-
vciQdins

from vitium, vice, we have the Latin ad-

glish derivative); similarly,
jective which essentially means full oft characterized
,

by and gives us the derivative and ,

from msidiae, treachery, comes the Latin adjective ,

meaning /u// ofl characterized by and giving us the

derivative

2. Which adjective does not have a related meaning?

a.meus b. secundus c. tuus d. vester

3. Which adverb does not have a related meaning?

a. hodie b. ibi c. nunc d. tum

4. Which noun is nearly synonymous with >itium?

a. adulescentia b. animus c. caelum d. culpa

5. Which is not interrogative?

a. -ne b. quando c. -que d. ubi

6. Which is not a conjunction?

a. igitur b. propter c. -que d. ubi

Name: Section: Date:

 .

50 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 6

B. Complete each statement with an EngUsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 To "perpetuate" the memory of an event is to make it

2. A "plenipotentiary" is, hterally, a person
of

LECTIONES
A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Patria vestra semper erit libera; quare, discipull mel, ibi remanete!

2. Si nunc cenabitis, satis habere poteritis.

3. Non debemus culpare verba sana magistrae nostrae, amica mea.

4. Poterasne, igitur, in pulchra patria tua manere?

5. Ubi tyrannus est, virT non possunt esse iTberT.

6. Tyrannl multa vitia semper habebunt.

7. Poteratis perlcula belli videre.

8. Insidias nautae hen non tolerabas.

9. Debes viros stultos de msidils monere.

10. LibrI boni verlque poterant patriam Graecorum conservare.

 Sum: Future and Imperfect Indicative; Possum: Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative 51

B. Answer these questions on "Dr. Fell" and "The Decline of Roman

Morals."

1. Amatne poeta Sabidium? (Responde Latlne, Respond in Latin, i.e.,

with a complete Latin sentence.)

2. Potestne poeta dicere quare? (Responde Latlne.)

3. Quid poeta Sabidio dicere potest? (Latlne.)

4. What is unusual in the arrangement of the poem's four clauses

(look at the order of the four verbs)?

5. How is this arrangement especially appropriate to the point Mar-

tial is making in the poem?

6. The Livy passage employs contrast to make its point. What two
phrases are contrasted in the first sentence?
and
What two words are contrasted in the last sentence?
and

7. The overall tone of the passage is

a. joyful b. optimistic c. patriotic d. pessimistic

STc semper tyrannls: Thus always to tyrants

Motto of the state of Virginia

Name Section: Date:

 .

7
Third Declension Nouns

INTELLECENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Identify the case endings for third declension nouns (other than
i-stems, which are introduced in Chapter 14) of all three genders.
2. Recognize, form, and translate third declension nouns (other than
i-stems) of all genders.

Whenever you turn to the exercises in this

Salvete, discipulae discipuUque!
workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding
chapter of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary
and even the Latina Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memo-
rize paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Bonam for-

tunam!

GRAMMATICA
1 The gender of third declension nouns may be
a. masculine b. feminine c. neuter Cd^^ny of these

2. Which case ending firmly identifies the declension to which a noun

belongs?
a. nominative (bTgenitive c. dative d. accusative
 Third Declension Nouns 53

3. With the exception of the singular of -usZ-ius words of the second de-
all nouns and adjectives of all declensions is
clension, the vocative of
identical to the

^^ nominative b. genitive c. dative d. accusative

4. The gender of third declension nouns denoting human beings is usu-

ally f'^ or according to sense; otherwise,
I

the best rule for third declension nouns is to *- ^ '-^ *" '\ the gen-
der when first encountered in a chapter's vocabulary list.

5. An adjective's ending must agree with that of the noun it modifies in

all but which one of the following?
a. number b. gender c. case nj spelling

6. Give the information requested below for each o( the third declen-
sion endings listed.

Case(s) Number Gender(s)

^
a. -um
n
b. -ibus .^AL
c. -a J
1 i- lA
-j^
d. -es

e. -is -U-

f -em vy_

g-e I^^
h. -T
.n ,v
,\:\

Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. cTvitatem (Greek)

b. temporT (second)

c. reges (safe)

d. amoris (perpetual) fi: {'A \A.

corporum ^^ u A '7^
t Dr^oj
\'^
e. (healthy) -^ '

r < >v; V'kA

t
Name: Section: Dale:
54 Workbook for Wheelock^s Latin: Chapter 7

8. Identify the base and gender of labor vester, your labor, decline it
fully, and provide the English meanings appropriate to each case.

base: \o^-ir V-l^Vj gender: ^

Singular
Latin English

Nom. labor vester your labor

Gen. —U-
>^
Dat. L^^yj^2a^^.
\J'
\ r /^;
Ace. .^H.>wU ^^^'"^'^
u «^vV b :^ v^-^sH-o ^'^^xs^yy f-
Abl.
T^
Plural
Latin English

'-^^'^'^ \,.V
Nom. W^S-i-rx' ^ fc-\A V 1^
Gen. U. tA. V^c r\j\j\r\ b rv >A/\ C ^ I

Dat. U
Ace.

Abl. t^'^-AA. f H
9. Identify the base and gender of carmen novum, new song, decline it
^""'^
fully, and provide the English meanings appropriate to each case.

base: ^ .-c^J^o^V ^ gender: <o

Singular
Latin English

Nom. carmen novum new song

(I
Gen.

Dat. irci z'r^v"

Ace. e^>
i- II
Abl.
•e. CA'T>^
 . ^

Third Declension Nouns 55

Plural
Latin English

Nom.

Gen. ./^--v- >-.^-^/N^ ^V ^-

Dat. ^-^ ^ ^
"^i^r
Ace. . L^

Abl.
xWs
^"'"^ ' ^>
:
iX
^ >
:--nx/vV
^'^x^ '^>

10. Identify the number, gender, case, and grammatical use of these
nouns in the chapter's Practice and Review sentences (e.g.,
magistri [sentence 1], singular, masculine, genitive, possession).

Number Gender Case Use

a. cTvitatem (2) y ^5? ^ - ._ ^

b. Mores (4) f /vy\ J^^- -^y^\V^b|'(^

c. mores (7) ^ /\^ /V (

d. temporum (8) ^[
'.

^"^ '•''

-' "^ /-"^"^^ CiJjO

e. pace (9)

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 hominum ITberorum V^'^ryxsf^^ •f^AI' si^^^K^

2. nomina nostra J \i -f^ E r~ f'^/^^'^.

''ijs^'\

3. virgine Romana 'sH/tAJ ,'mI^'^A5 ^ TNJ^A^JU/\>>-^^^

" ' '

carminl pulchro T'^ J^
'

4. " '
v
^ ^ - ^^ ^

Name: Section: Date:

 . )

56 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 7

B. Transfoim one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (e.g., puella fortuna > fortuna puellae, the
girl's fortune).

Transformation Translation

1 reglna gloria
r.
( dA wT^^ t— ly j-^-^/

2. hber uxor v>^>ONAt S ^^ ^XDJ

3. tyrannus terra ^^Iv V(^ £ ^^ j^T^AT^^d^

J
C. Supply the correct forms of the words shown in parentheses and
translate.
Pi^^^LoJ^
1. Audebimus, igitur, servare v^f^ C^^ '(f^ r

2. J^^^'^ (jnos) \>Arvxv^j^onio; gen. pi.) hodie sunt malL

3. Propter _I__ll__^;^^irtus), her! audebas ibi remanere.

4. Tn >^v^o
^(^'^ l^ (labor) saepe est vera V ^ ^ 'WS (virtus).

5. Sunt multa C>gsX^NJt,^(carmpn) de

^
.Aia^f^ (amor)
in ' •
vs^LS (httera) poetarum antlquorum.

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. The students then could not tolerate the tyrant's vices and bad
character.

2. Will you, therefore, now dare to overcome and murder the state's

new king?
 ..

Third Declension Nouns 57

3. The Greeks used to praise the goddess in beautiful literature.

"^
y^aVlVnt > L^^vtAc^Kva

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Which Latin word does not have an English derivative with identi-
cal spelling (except for macrons)?
a. audeo b. labor c. mores d. post

2. What adjective learned in a previous chapter is related in form

and meaning to hom5? What noun learned pre-
viously is related to virtus?

3. List three words learned previously that are related to the noun
amor.

4. Which preposition cannot take the accusative?

a. de b. post c. propter d. sub

5. Which noun is least closely related in meaning?

a. homo b. reglna c. uxor d. virgo

6. Which noun is least closely related in meaning?

a. carmen b. labor c. liber d. littera

7. Which noun is an antonym of labor?

a. cTvitas b. mos c. pax d. otium

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g.. 'A "laudatory" speech is full
of praise").

1 To "collaborate" is to closely together.

2. An "audacious" person is ready to anything.

3. An "uxorious" husband is especially submissive to his

4. A "subterranean" animal lives the

Name: Section: Dale:

58 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 7

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Litterae Graecae erant plenae multorum carminum de amore vir-

ginum puerorumque.

2. Dabuntne eras litteras reglnae regique'i

3. Propter multum laborem, corpora virorum vestrorum erant satis

Sana.

4. Quare, post tempora mala et propter Insidias, paucos magnae

virtutis ibi habebamus.

5. Ubi nomina stultorum videbimus?

6. Pecunia est nihil sine moribus bonis.

7. Mores hominis boni erunt bom.

8. In multls cTvitatibus terrlsque pax non poterat valere.

9. Homines avarl tyrannos nunc superare et necare audebunt.

10. Amor patriae in cTvitate nostra semper valebat.

i
 Third Declension Nouns 59

B. Answer these questions on "Lucretia" and "Catullus."

1 . Quare Lucretia se necavit? (Responde Latlne, Respond in Latin,

i.e., with a complete Latin sentence.)

2. Quid Lucretia amabat? (Responde Latine.)

3. Quid poeta Cornelio dabat? (Latine.)

4. Cornelius erat CatullT.

a. liber b. vir c. amicus d. doctus

5. Quid erat in libro novo CatullI?

a. carmina b. poeta c. perpetua d. magister

Amor magnus doctor est: Love is a powerful teacher

St. Augustine

Name: Section: Date:

,.
r^

8
Third Conjugation:
Present Infinitive^ Present^
Future^ and Imperfect
Indicative^ Imperative

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize, form, and translate the present infinitive, the present, fid-

ture, and imperfect indicative, and the present imperative of third conjugation
verbs in the active voice.
2. Recognize, form, and translate the four irregular third conjugation sin-
gular imperatives.

Salve, discipule! When you turn to these exercises, you should have already
thoroughly studied the corresponding chapter of Wheelock's Latin, espe-
cially the new grammar and vocabulary and even the Latina Est Gaudium
section. And always memorize paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the
words aloud. ST Latinam discis, age gratias magistrd tu6!
 Third Conjugation: Present Infinitive, Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative, Imperative 61

GRAMMATICA
1. Which of the four Latin verb conjugations is characterized by a short
stem vowel?
a. first b. second c. third d. fourth

2. Which two verbs in the chapter's vocabulary are not third conju-
gation?

3. The third conjugation stem vowel -e- is replaced by what three vowels
in the present tense?

4. The vowel alternation in the present tense of third conjugation verbs

is comparable to that seen in what tense of first and second conjuga-
tion verbs?
a. present b. future c. imperfect d. all these

5. Which vowel is not seen in the future tense endings of third conjuga-
tion verbs?
a. a b. e c. e d. o

6. The imperfect tense is formed just as in the first and second conjuga-
tions, except that the stem vowel is changed to
a. a b. e c. T d. o

7. Write out the irregular singular imperatives of dTco, diico, facio, and
fero.

8. Give the information requested for each of the following third conju-
gation endings.

Tense Number Person

a. -imus

b. -es

c. -unt

d. -itis

e. -emus

f -6

A g. -ent

h. -it

Name: Section: Date:

62 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 8

r>\
1. -etis ^.<^(^
j. -am

9. Conjugate gero, gerere, in the present, future, and imperfect active

indicative, and give the two imperatives.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

7.

Imperfect
Singular Plural

Imperatives: (singular) (plural)

10. List in order the third conjugation verbs in Practice and Review
sentences 1-8, and identify the person, number, and tense of each.

Verb Person Number Tense

a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

f .
 Third Conjugation: Present Infinitive, Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative, Imperative 63

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1 . Ducite homines.

Transformation: C)\(6&gi^ . W^|/V^W\

Translation: Ku^x/ R^ Ir'^MTlCK^if

2. Fratrem doceo.

Transformation: i"rc\VoW\ c\aC, eM\A ^

Translation: ^t VxXol> A^W W/o V^-f, /^
3. De iTbertatibus scrlbunt. .

Transformation: 0^ VW^^Ci^V*^
Translation: V^ vJ\r>'\^ c^^WwA- V>WV»fb
<>

4. Bella gerebant.

Transformation: pt UtUr> <t^^r^\o(K?r

Translation: ^V^ uJtK.S (L»vr<nW V?g^KVu^

5. Demonstrabis rationem.

Transformation: (i^VAVJAsVc^VsN'^S wWxrs^/;^

Translation: >aOVa (Wvc^f^^V^^g, wV^^
6. Tyrann5s necabunt.

Transformation:
T ^vT^v^oS r\t(U^\) V '^

7.
Translation:
5^ w\\\ V^xW
-^M^^
Graecum vincebam.
Vy^vvA V
Transformation: (^\r-gA-tC\^A 'V\V^<^<»,V)^^v^^^^

Translation: U>f UJ€-rc- <^oA\a|/^|At^ Vki, Qfg/g.W^5>

8. DiscipulT eras discent. .

Transformation: ^0 \^<^\Y^V^^^^^^ c^VlvV

Translation: '^C- ^WA^a \-(( «>^\\\ V\Cf\ Vo'0/vM<r/>^>w

Name: Section: Date:

 .

64 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 8

9. Corpus trahebat.

Transformation: 63V-VVA.S nT(xV^WWV

Translation: IUca^ ^trt g^^c^r^^O ^fVlnoclu
10. Virgo heri erat salva.

Transformation: ^«^gy> V\t/V\ ^ro^\r ^<^Uo^>^

Translation: M^tAA >0<^*k^j\ ^n, 5^v>^

B. Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a mean-
ingful phrase, and then translate (e.g., poeta liber > liber poetae, the
poet's book).

Transformation Translation

1 laus scn-ptor 6Cn^r ^^^Ij

2. victoriae rex t^^i^V^ vic\br\<i^

3. sor5res virtutes V^'r^tp 5eV^iroim

4. carmen discipula ct-f^dpwU (^xj^fAWX

5. reglna mores ^A^^^f, Cc^V/'-'^ _

C. Supply the correct forms of the words shown in parentheses and
translate.

1 Ratio homines nunc ex vitiTs ad virtutem ri^,\^ (agere; pres.).

2. jCf \ D^ffty (scrlbere; 2nd pers. sg. imper.) nihil de copiTs.

3. Dea amoris multos N/tnC.fx' (vincere; pres.).

4. Amor laudis victoriaeque homines semper vf^M^'^

(trahere; fut.).

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . He will lead the troops to perpetual glory there.

i
 Third Conjugation: Present Infinitive, Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative, Imperative 65

2. The state will never thank the Greek tyrant.

3. Your (s g.) new friend was writing a le tter to my sister.

4. Because of your worlc, you will have an abundance of praise.

VIS VERBORUM
Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1. "Victorious" derives from the Latin adjective ,

which is formed from the noun victoria.

2. Which verb does not have a related meaning?

a. ago b. disco c. duco d. traho

3. Which noun does not have a related meaning?

a. frater b. scrlptor c. soror d. uxor

4. Which noun does not have a related meaning?

a. fama b. gloria c. laus d. ITbertas

5. Which adverb is an antonym of numquam?

a. ibi b. nunc c. semper d. tamen

6. Many Latin verbs form masculine third declension nouns by

replacing -um of the verb's fourth principal part with -or; such
nouns typically denote a person who performs whatever action is

indicated by the verb stem. E.g., ago gives us actor, actoris, m..
meaning literally a person who acts, an actor. Identify the nouns,
and their meanings, that are similarly derived from the following
Latin verbs.

Latin Noun Translation

a. doceo

b. scrTbo

c. vinco

d. demonstro

Name: .'\prtinn Date:

66 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 8

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1. An "expatriate" lives of his

2. To "inscribe" a document is literally to

3. A "docile" animal is easily

4. A "p.s." or "postscript" is the main
part of a letter or other document.

5. One who is "invincible" can be

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the hmits of sound Enghsh idiom.

1 . Quare scrlptor litteras de TnsidiTs scribere non tum audebat?

2. Propter tempora secunda pacem veram habere poterimus.

3. Agricola uxorque in terra sub caelo pulchrd saepe cenabant.

4. Ubi homines regem malum nunc tolerare possunt?

5. Due Graecum ad me, et deabus gratias agam.

6. Dum tyrannus copias ducit, possumus nihil agere.

7. NovT, igitur, cTvitatl nostrae gratias agebant.

i
8. Tyrannus magnas copias ex cTvitate nostra ducet et bellum geret.

I
 Third Conjugation: Present Infinitive, Present, Future, and Imperfect Indicative, Imperative 67

9. Magna copia pecuniae, tamen, homines ad sapientiam non ducit.

10. Ratio homines ex culpTs ad bonam vltam saepe ducere potest.

B. Answer these questions on "The Ethics of Waging War."

1. CTvitas bellum gerere debet.

a. sine causa bona b. sine Ira
c. sine officio d. sine dementia

2. Bellum erit necessarium, sT patriam iTbertatemque sine bello

defendere poterimus.
a. non b. tum c. tamen d. autem

3. The attitude toward waging war expressed by Cicero in this

passage is

a. belligerent b. pacifist c. pragmatic d. incendiary

Amor vincit omnia: Love conquers all

Vergil

Name: Section: Date:

9
Demonstratives Hic^ llle^

Iste; Special -Jus Adjectives

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Recognize, decline, and translate the "demonstratives" hie, ilk, and
iste.

2. Distinguish between these demonstratives, in both usage and transla-

tion, as either adjectives or pronouns.

3. Recognize, decline, and translate the nine common irregular firstIsec-
ond declension adjectives that have a genitive singular ending in -Tus and a da-
tive singular in -i.

Whenever you turn to the exercises in this

Salvete, discipulae discipuUque!
workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding
chapter of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary
and even the Latina Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memo-
rize paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Semper

amate LatTnam!

GRASAMATICA
1 . Demonstratives are used to particular
persons or things.
 Demonstratives Hie, llle, Iste; Special -Jus Adjectives 69

2. In general hie indicates a person or thing near the

iste indicates a person or thing near the , and ille indi-

cates a person or thing distant from

3. The declension of demonstratives generally follows that of

magnus, -a, -um; the principal irregularities occur in the

, , and singular cases.

4. Which is not a possible translation for the forms of hie, haee, hoe?
a. this b. these c. those d. the latter

5. Which is not a possible translation for the forms of ille, ilia, illud?

a. that b. those c. the famous d. the latter

6. Which of the three demonstratives can have a contemptuous or dis-

paraging sense?
a. hie b. ille c. iste d. all these

7. The nine irregular first/second declension adjectives introduced in

this chapter are declined like magnus, -a, -um; the principal excep-
tions are in the and singular cases.

8. Which of the following is not a special -TusM adjective?

a. alius b. nullus c. secundus d. unus

9. Decline the phrase ille loeus {that place) in the singular only, with the
English meanings.

Latin English

Nom. ille locus that place

(ien.

Dat.

Aee.

Abl.

10. Decline the phrase hoe studium (this study) in the plural only, with
English meanings.

Latin English

Nom. .

Gen.

Dat.

Aee.

Abl.

Same: Section: Date:

70 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 9

1 1 . Identify in order the five demonstratives used as adjectives in

Practice and Review sentences 1-8.

12. Identify in order the four demonstratives used as pronouns in

Sententiae Antiquae 1-7.

13. Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. studil (neither)

b. morbo (dat., one)

c. scrTptoris (another)

d. laud! (alone)

e. fratris (either)

14. Give the information requested for each demonstrative.

Case(s) Numb€r(s) Gender(s) Translation(s)

a. isti

b. istls t^O=L 2 ^^^ Mr^V

c. istlus

d. isto
KA a^n^At-^j_ ^^^^ m
e. ill!

f ilium

g. haec

hhoc -^Ef^y>ur^ \ ?mJ ^1

i.huic /Bg gb(^A-_J aM^^ \L-

j. illae

15. Give the information requested for each irregular adjective.

Case(s) Niimber(s) Gender(s) Translation(s)

a.nulllus ^ ^ tlAll C\[OAL_

V b.ull6 fA>\ 5^ t^ /
^^
\Xrv>
 .

Demonstratives Hie, I lie, Iste; Special -fus Adjectives 71

c. tot! M//f All

d. solum 7-
ii i
e. unlus

f. alii 1 1^ A/u,ehLi^
aJ II
g. aliud Att. _ 1

h. alter! _ 1

i. utrlus 1

j. neutrum

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1 haec carmina TKfc^ ^^

2. iliacopia 4W.V <>JbiAV\gX<v\iCX^
3. huic temporl ^ •^C^< V\VC
4. huius virginis ^i V\f^C\
f^^ "^

5. ill! reglnae ^ -JWA- giuL/jg/y^

6. null! morbo Mil.

7. huic clvitatl sol

8. totlus corporis

9. nullTus rationis _A Klo rrxA/,uv^

10. huius nominis solTus -JWa^. r\cMMA Cf/\lA
no love (ace.) Am^V^ ia^'. (AAf/^i/^

12. to/for the whole country *uA\a^ K^l1^C^

13. to/for one place \AJf\\P^ \^C4j^

14. no brothers (ace.) A/tA.\.Vfc^ 1V^t^3T<^V^^S
15. by another book "^^J- <vU^ ^jJoCT^-. VyMV^O

16. to/for that king alone i \\ ^

'^^^ V (L^^ '^A/J^

Name: Section: Date:

 .
.

72 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 9

17. those customs (acc.) \l\cxs yiy»fV)

18. that study (nom.) \V\ UX .^VvAa 1 lA.»^^

19. of that sister alone A^ VnS> 4At?AwJN jSpf rO^TlS sJljii)

20. to/for one wife \CV\^r^ {AJ>(^OVi^

B. Supply the correct form of the words shown in parentheses, and
translate.

1 Habetis enim tvV^A \ ^^&(nullus, -a, -um) virtutes.

2. Cras videbimus tamen (\\ tVA.cA^ (alius, -a, -ud) nova loca.

.11. ^ AJkA^ r^'^'^A^

3. Fama \, W (VXv (ille, -a, -ud) victoriae remanet.

4. Multl loci "^MyCiA^ (hie, haec, hoc) librT sunt plenl sapientiae.

.^Tmn /VWvaa ^Ua^M ^Vo^^s^ \or<VU cW^fvi^l

5. Propter istum laborem, pacem iTbertatemque in <OUj>^
(totus, -a, -um) terra habebamus.

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 They were never able to teach those studies of yours.

2. No passage of either letter is true.

AO \jbja:ik f-W\uuS "^u^-^ "^^^

3. Another friend will thank my daughters.

(WkCt^ o^/>Krryi^ j^rt^^X r>^Y^. </t\(V

4. We often dared to lead our troops into that other region. fJ-sg/P^^

5. WiihmrraTyT^soK^ey were waging

cxevT^^^AP^
V
 .

Demonstratives Hie, llle, Iste; Special -fus Adjectives 73

D. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 ad aliam cTvitatem C^c\ r^WKS C<^1 Wk^

2. ex illTs terrls ZK ]^ ^t^CCf^

3. post has sorores f^ ^T y^v^C ^r Ygrft

^

4. sub portls alterls ^^ ^ fiy\\frr1> fatHy

5. in aliud studium J)(!^ M«6v' SW\\ Cs,

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 The adjective studi5sus, -a, -um means literally of

, and gives us the English derivative

2. Which adjective is an antonym of morbosus, -a, -um?

a. novus b. sanus c. secundus d. vester

3. Which English word is not related to unus, -a, -um?

a. unit b. unite c. untie d. onion

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1 . Persons who are "unanimous" are of

2. A "student" approaches his or her work with

3. A "neutral" party takes side in a dispute.

4. An "annulled" contract has legal force.

Name: Seel ion: Date:

74 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 9

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as hterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Dum istl bellum nimis malum gerebant, hi cTvitatem ex bello ad

pacem ducere audebant.

2. Ex his alils studils novis multam sapientiam virtutemque tra-

hemus.

3. Vincetne ilium avarum amor pecuniae'^

4. In illo hbro multa de hoc homine demonstrabit.

5. Onus vir istas copias in hanc terram tum ducebat.

6. Tota patria huic deae soli gratias hodie aget.

7. Hie solus, igitur, me de amore carminum litterarumque docere

poterat.

8. nil soli stultl nulla perlcula in hoc consiUo vident.

9. Non solum mores sed etiam Insidias illlus laudare nunc audes.

'il
10. Propter victoriam enim unlus hominis haec civitas valebat.
 .

Demonstratives Hie, llle, Iste; Special -fus Adjectives 75

B. Answer these questions on "When I Have Enough."

1 Africanus est

a. avarus b. bonus c. sanus d. vir magnae sapientiae

2. Quid non habet Africanus?

a. mlliens b. multa pecunia c. satis pecuniae d. amor pecuniae

3. Quandd vir avarus satis pecuniae habebit?

a. hodie b. numquam c. nunc d. semper

4. Quid debet avarus discere?

a. nihil b. amor pecuniae c. philosophia d. excusatidnes bonae

Haec studia adulescentiam alunt: These studies nourish the young

Cicero

Name Section: Date

10
Fourth Conjugation and -io
Verbs of the Third

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize, form, and translate the present active infinitive and impera-
tive and the present, fixture, and imperfect active indicative offourth conjuga-
tion verbs.
2. Recognize, form, and translate the present active infinitive and impera-
tive and the present, future, and imperfect active indicative of -id verbs of the
third conjugation.

Whenever you turn to the exercises in this

Salvete, discipulae discipuGque!
workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding
chapter of Wheelock's Latin. And remember always to memorize paradigms
and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. VTvite et valete!

GRAMMATICA
1. The fourth conjugation is characterized by the stem vowel

2. The stem vowel is long in all conjugations except the

a. first b. second c. third d. fourth
 Fourth Conjugation and -id Verbs of the Third 77

3. Certain third conjugation verbs are formed in the present, future, and
imperfect active indicative in exactly the same way as fourth conjuga-
tion verbs, except that the stem vowel is always
a. long b. short c. dropped d. changed to -e-

4. Third -io and fourth conjugation verbs retain the -i- throughout all

forms of the present, future, and imperfect active indicative. T/F

5. The imperfect tense sign -ba- is preceded in third -io and fourth conju-
gation verbs by
a. -a- b. -e- c. -i- d. -ie-

6. The future tense sign for the fourth conjugation is the same as for the
a. first b. second c. third d. none of these

7. Identify the conjugation, give the singular and plural imperatives, and
translate the following verbs.

Conjugation Sg. Imper. PI. Imper. Translation

a. disco, discere

b. doceo, docere

c. fugio, fugere

d. venio. venire

e. tolero, tolerare

f facio, facere

g. invenio, invenire

h. dlco. dlcere

i. maneo, manere

j. traho, trahere

8. Conjugate venio, venire, in the present, future, and imperfect active

indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Name: Section: Date:

78 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 10

Imperfect
Singular Plural

Conjugate facid, facere, in the present, future, and imperfect active

indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Imperfect
Singular Plural

-?

EXERCITATIONES

Transform the indicative sentence into an imperative sentence that

would result in the action indicated, and then translate into Enghsh
(e.g., Discipulus Latinam discit > Discipule, disce Latinam, Student,
learn Latin!).

1. Sorores viam inveniunt.

Transformation: V
\ ft VtV\ \fW borpygi
Translation^ ^^O^C ^{ft>A VV^f "^^
2. Prater officium facit.

Transformation:

Translation: €>V^»^cWv^ g*^CO <WNn^\ rLy V v^vnV^ (XJt^

I
 Fourth Conjugation and -id Verbs of the Third 79

3. Copiae timorem
Ti fugiunt.

Transformation:

Translation: .c>aA^ AA^u^ r\t4. kri0^ pTCgcr

4. Scrlptor veritatem dlcit.

Transformation: C^ tcfc. '^g>ApVir' Vtr M^Tli^

Translation: kjrir^lr 6<>^ VV>C tWV.^^
5. Amicus meus rationem audit.

i Transformation: A^MAlJfcr c^Jsr^Cfigk /»V^li» t^h\Ak 4^

Translation: WiA^- WUA IwW-S rPv.\-|VA

B. Make the single transformation indicated and translate the new form
(e.g., dicit, to imperfect: answer, dlcebat, he was speaking).

Transformation Translation

^ l.h6rafugit,tofut. Vv>V<^ TU£y,| 4<'incU(W(

^
H<^
5i.%^AW^

/ civ\C^ "^
2. d ucite na utas, to sg. i\c^i^/A^^ \i.n^

IG^I^csT^pis, to impf. O^rtS.iMi *» ^lWu^ -

-^wAl "V^W ^55^
4. ibi vTvent. to pres. \V)\ VN^^W^ XVccA V l^L
5. ex via veniebam, to pi. gJc \rItS^ Vf^veW^^^ % W<- UX >V<.

C. Supply the correct form of the words shown in parentneses ana

translate.

1. In illo loco numquam t/ VV \t. ^t>\»<^S ( vTvere; 1st pers. pi. impf.).

It HI fratres beati voluptatem amlcitiae in senectute VJv'^vO^cRr

(invenlre; fut.). c«av^ vyjo^ ^\¥^(><:^n
Mrvs-s UroAW Wptescg^ fe^^^_p\A#^|.
3. nfVAfM^ (fugere: imper.) cupiditatem laudis. ml amTce!
t>jvh^ ILj. Vih>»N tw ^^,n^<^ rfP-^^Si/^t^./viM fyn Vy
4. Victoria sola enim iTbertatem non semper t€^L-V\ (facere;
pres.).

Name: Section: Date:

80 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 10

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . The othej; sister finds pleasure in the study of nature.

2. While we speak, the hours are fleeing.

3. The sailors were coming to the troops on another road.

Vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Many jJiird declension nouns with nominatives in -tas give us En-

glish derivatives in -ty. Identify the English words that are formed
in this way from the following nouns.
/ cupiditas Gbertas Veritas

2. The Latin adjective is based on the noun timor,

gives us the English derivative , and literally means
fearful.

Many Latin verbs form feminine third declension nouns by replac-

ing -um of the verb's fourth principal part with -io, genitive -idnis;
such nouns typically produce English derivatives in -ion and de-
note performance of the action indicated by the verb stem. E.g.,
conservo gives us Latin conservatio, conservationis, f and English ,

"conservation," both meaning literally {the act of) saving, preserv-

ing. Identify the Latin and English nouns, and their meanings,

that are similarly derived from the following Latin verbs.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. audio

b. dlco

c. mvenio
 Fourth Conjugation and -id Verbs of the Third 81

B. Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1. A "viaduct" is a type of bridge that literally or sup-

ports a

2. A "voluptuary's" chief goal in life is

3. A "convention" is an event where people

to conduct business.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as hterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Neuter scriptor de remedio uUo istlus morbl dlcebat.

2. Istl homines propter cupidiratem pecuniae erunt nimis stultl.

3. Ille poeta Onus multa carmina de fratre beato scribebat.

4. Tyrannus hanc totam cTvitatem capere numquam poterit.

5. Tempus fugit; horae fugiunt; senecttis venit, sed me non vincet.

6. In patriam vestram cum sororibus fratribusque mels veniebant.

7. Flliam tuam in civitate utra non invenies.

8. Quoniam iste bellum semper facit. nullam pacem habebimus.

Same: Section: Date:

82 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 10

B. Answer these questions on "The Incomparable Value of Friendship."

1 . Quis Who) erat scnptor huius loci? (Responde

( in tota sententia

Latina, Respond in a complete Latin sentence. )

2. Quid Cicero cum amicitia comparare potest?

3. Amicitia ex non venit.

a. fortuna b. sapientia c.amore d. virtute

4. Vita tyrannl non est beata, quoniam iste habet

a. veros amlcos b. mores bonos
c. nuUam amlcitiam d. magnam fortunam
I
Vive hodie: Live today
Martial
11
Personal Pronouns Ego, TO,
and Is; Demonstratives Is

and Idem

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Define the term "personal pronoun."
2. Recognize, decline, and translate the first, second, and third person pro-
nouns.
3. Explain the limited uses ofpersonal pronouns.
4. Distinguish, in usage and translation, the differences between is, ea, id

as personal pronoun and as demonstrative.

5. Recognize, decline, and translate the demonstrative idem, eadem, idem.
6. Identify the four first and second person possessive adjectives.

you begin these exercises, be sure you

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque! Before
have already thoroughly studied Chapter of Wheelock's Latin, especially
1 1

the new grammar and vocabulary and even the Latina Est Gaudium section.
And remember, as always, to memorize the new paradigms and vocabulary
by repeating them aloud. Ego LatTnam amo —
amatisne Latlnam etiam v6s?

Name: Section: Date:

 1

84 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

GRAMMATICA
1 . A personal pronoun is employed in place of a to indi-
cate a particular from the point of view of the

Which is not a personal pronoun?

a. ego b. is c. iste d. tu

Decline the first and second person pronouns and give the transla-
tions.

1st Person 2nd Person

Latin English Latin English

Singular

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Decline the third person pronoun is, ea, id, and give the translations.

Masculine Feminine Neuter

Latin English Latin English Latin English

Singular

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.
 .

Personal Pronouns Ego, TO, and Is; Demonstratives Is and Idem 85

Plural

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

5. Decline fully in Latin the demonstrative Idem, eadem, idem.

Masculine Feminine Neuter

Singular

Nom.

Cien.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

6. When preceding and modifying a noun in the same gender, number,

and case, forms of is, ea, id function as

a. personal pronouns b. demonstratives

c. possessive adjectives d. all these

7. List, giving the sentence number, the two instances of is, ea, id as
a demonstrative in the Latin Practice and Review sentences of
Chapter 1 1

( ) ( )

Name: Section: Date:

 . 1

86 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

8. The nominatives of the Latin personal pronouns were most

commonly used for
a. subjects b. predicate nominatives c. emphasis d. all these

9. The genitives of the first and second personal pronouns were most
commonly used to indicate possession. T/F

10. Which was/were used to show possession?

a. tuus b. eius c. eorum d. all these

1 1 Identify the number, case, and grammatical use of these personal

pronouns in the chapter's Practice and Review sentences
(e.g., eum [sentence 1], singular, accusative, direct object).

Number Case Use

a. eam (1)

b. Tu(2)

c. eius (2)

d. ego (3)

e. me (5)

fel(6)

g. nobis (9)

h. eorum (12)

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1. n5bTs (abl.) 2. it

3. idem 4. vestrT
t
5. mihi 6. for you (pi.)

7. eius (f ) 8. by her

9. nostrum 10. the same man (ace.)

 .

Personal Pronouns Ego, TO, and Is; Demonstratives Is and Idem 87

B. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 eldem consull

2. caput eius

3. Me intelleget.

4. Earn mittebam.

5. Tu es cara.

C. Supply the correct personal pronoun in the second clause to refer to

the underlined word in the first clause, and then translate (e.g., Puella
est bona; laudo. > Puella est bona; earn laudo, The girl is

good; I praise her).

1 . Alter consul in hanc patriam venit, ubi videbo.

2. Quoniam iste vir est avarus, nullam pecuniam dabimus.

3. Nos soli sunt sani; solos, igitur, audite!

4. Quod te nimium amo, sine vTvere numquam potero.

D. Supply the correct form of the word shown in parentheses and

translate.

1. Nemo ad (is) copias mittet.

2. Die (ego) veritatem.

3 Filia beata tua (tfi) bene intellegebat.

4. Mitto neminem ad (is) consulem.

Name Section: Date:

 . 1

88 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

E. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . The same friendly girl will send their books to us.

2. Her dear daughter was fleeing with one friend into another place.

3. Give him your friendship.

4. You will not find it without care.

V/5 VERBORUM
Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary hst.

1 Which verb does not have a related meaning?

a. cogito b. intellego c. mitto d. sentio I
2. Which adverb does not have a related meaning?
a. hodie b. satis c. semper d. tum

3. Which conjunction is nearlysynonymous with quoniam?

a. autem b. enim c. neque d. quod

4. Which conjunction is not postpositive?

a. autem b. enim c. igitur d. quod

5. Which is not negative?

a. -ne b. nee c. non d. numquam
6 Complete the analogy caput oculus liber : : : :

a. cupiditas b. hora c. morbus d. verbum

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 We "cherish" persons who are to us.

2. To "emit" signals is literally to them

 .

Personal Pronouns Ego, Tu, and Is; Demonstratives Is and Idem 89

3. A "benefactor" things for others

(who regard him as a "beneficent" person); and in a "benedic-
tion" a minister speaks briefly at the end of a service, blessing his
congregation and wishing them

LECTIONES
A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 Videsne eam feminam? Amasne eam? Dabisne el id ddnum?

2. Nee eum nee eam, autem, ad me mittent.

3. Quid tu de natura senectutis intellegis?

4. Mitte, O ml frater, ullam cupiditatem pecuniae et studium

voluptatis.

5. Is morbus etiam me terrebat; quid tia. soror cara, de eo sentls?

6. Uter amicus tibi id hodie dabit.

7. Fugiesne mecum in ea via, arnica mea":

8. Copiae eorum illam totam civitatem numquam capient.

9. Vos mecum ad amicum carum eius mittuni.

10. Nos tecum in terram eorum nunc mittit.

Name: Section: Date:

 1

90 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 1

B. Answer these questions on "Cicero Denounces Catiline in the Senate."

1 . Quis ( Who) in eo loc5 dicit? (Responde in tota sententia Latina.)

2. Quid CatilTna agere audet?

a. in senatum venire b. Tnsidias facere
c. consilia mala agere d. all these

3. Quare senatus consulque errant?

a. quod de CatilTna et Tnsidiis eius non intellegunt

b. quoniam CatilTnam amicosque eius nimis amant
c. quod consilium habent sed tamen non agunt
d. all these

4. Quid CatilTna agere debet?

i
a. ex patria fugere b. in cTvitate remanere
c. consulem ad mortem ducere d, all these

Nemo solus satis sapit: No one by himself is sufficiently wise

Plautus
12
Perfect Active System of
All Verbs

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

7. Identify the formsof the four principal parts of regular Latin verbs.
2. Define and explain the temporal sense of the three "perfect system"
tenses.

3. Identify the perfect active stem of any verb.

4. Recognize, form, and translate verbs of all four conjugations in the

three tenses of the perfect active system.

Salvete, amicT! Have you already studied Chapter 12 of Wheelock's Latin"}

Be sure to do so before attempting these exercises, and remember to memo-
rize the paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Do a thor-
ough job with this chapter and you, like Caesar, will be able to exclaim,
Venl, vidl, vTci!

GRAMMATICA

Which tense does not belong to the perfect system?

a. future perfect b. imperfect c. perfect d. pluperfect

Name: Section: Date:

92 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 12

2. All perfect active system forms are constructed on the stem found in
the principal part.
a. first b. second c. third d. fourth

3. The four principal parts of a regular Latin verb are the

a. first person singular of the
b
c. first person singular of the
d

4. Supply the indicated principal parts for these verbs from recent chap-
ters, and translate each literally.

Principal Parts: creo

Translation: I create

Principal Parts: facere

Translation: to make

Principal Parts: misi

Translation: I have sent

Principal Parts: inventum

Translation: having been found

The perfect active stem of any verb is found by dropping

from the third principal part.

Identify the perfect active stem of the following verbs from recent
chapters.

a. amitto b. audio c. capio

d. dlco e. fugio f intellego

g. sentio h. venio i. vTvo

7. The tense of esse provides the endings of the active

indicative tense; and the tense of esse
(except for the 3rd person plural) provides the endings of the active
indicative tense in all conjugations.
 .

Perfect Active System of All Verbs 93

8. Conjugate these Latin verbs from the current chapter in the indicated

tenses.

Perfect Put. Perf.

(amittd, to lose) (cad5, to fall)
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Pluperfect
(creo, to create)
Singular Plural

9. Translate the preceding verbs into Enghsh.

Perfect Fut. Perf.

(amitto, to lose) (cado, to fall)
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Pluperfect
(creo, to create)
Singular Plural

10. Which is not a correct translation of cecidT?

a. I fell b. I have fallen
c. I was falling d. none of these

1 1 Which is not a correct translation of creabas?

a. you kept creating b. you have created
c. you were creating d. you used to create

Name: Section: Date:

 :

94 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 12

12. Complete the analogy, the tense photograph

: :

the tense video.

:

13. In the perfect system we look at events of the past, present, or future,
and consider the impact of previously actions upon
those events.

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1. dixeram 2. they will have created

3. miserimus 4. we shall have lost

5. venistl 6. she had fallen

7. vicerant 8. you have seen (pi.)

9. vocaverunt 10. I had thought

B. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. In Asia diu (remanere; 3rd pers. sg. perf ).

2. DT ad caelum eam (mittere; fut. perf).

3. Caesar regl iTbertatem niiper (dare; plupf ).

4. De natura amicitiae litteras (scrTbere;

1st pers. pi. perf).

C. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1 . Adulescens cecidit.

Transformation:

Translation:

^
 Perfect Active System of All Verbs 95

2. Patres timdres amiserant.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Vos vias inveneritis.

Transformation:

Translation:

4. Matres eorum hen venerunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

5. Medicus diu vixerat.

Transformation:

Translation:

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. Even after many years no one had learned the whole truth.

2. Your mother and father have taught you well, my dear friend.

3. You had said (pi.) nothing about that consul's plans.

4. We shall have conquered neither our desires nor our fears.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Complete the analogy magnus parvus pater

: : : :

a. adulescens b filius c. prmcipium d. puer

Name: Section: Date:

 .

96 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 12

2. Which noun does not have a related meaning?

a. annus b. hora c. medicus d. tempus

3. Which adverb an antonym of the others?

is

a. diu b. numquam c. saepe d. semper

4. Which verb is an antonym of amitto?
a. cado b. creo c. intellego d. invenio

5. Give the third declension -or and -io nouns derived from the
fourth principal part of creo, their Uteral meanings, and their
direct English derivatives.

Meaning Derivarive

a. -or:

b. -io:

B. Complete each statement with an EngHsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 A "pro forma" action is undertaken appearances

only.

2. An "acerbic" letter has a tone.

3. The leaves of a "deciduous" tree in

winter.

4. A "matrilineal" society traces descent or inheritance through

the side of a family.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as hterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Idem consul, autem, timi fuit verum caput patriae nostrae.

2. Ea medica de morbls senectutis et remedils eorum scrTpserat.

 .

Perfect Active System of All Verbs 97

3. Quoniam hi acerb! diu remanebant, illi beat! ad Asiam num-

quam venerunt.

4. Studium litterarum ndbls multas voluptates dedit.

5. Nimis multT adulescentes pro patria ceciderunt et vitas aml-

serunt.

6. Quod magister amicus eorum discipulos a principio cum pa-

lientia docebit. multa post parvum tempus didicerint.

7. Is poeta carus carmina magna cum cura semper creabat.

8. Caesar eadem de principio illius belli dixit.

9. Etiam id bene fecera5.

10. Eum in eodem loco post paucas hdras invenerunt.

B. Answer these questions on "Pliny Writes to Marcellinus" and

"Diaulus."

1 Quis has litteras scrlpsit?

a. Fundanus b. ftlia FundanI c. Marcellinus d. Pllnius

2. Hie scrlptor de puella cara dicit; quis fuit pater eius? (Responde in

tota sententia.)

3. How old was the girl?

a. 10 years b. 11 years c. 12 years d. 13 years

Section: Date:
98 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 12

4. Quid natura el puellae dederat?

5. Quid haec puella non habuit?

a. amor patris matrisque b. magnl animi
c. sapientia et patientia d. remedium morbi

6. The ABBA arrangement known as "chiasmus," seen in vespillo

facit, fecerat . . . medicus in Martial's short poem about Diaulus,
was often used by Roman writers to emphasize contrast. Explain
briefly how the chiastic word order here not only demonstrates a
then/now contrast, but also humorously emphasizes a consistency
in Diaulus' activities from past to present.

In pruicipi5 erat Verbum, et Verbum erat apud Deum, etDeus erat Verbum:
In the beginning was the Word, and theWord was with God,
and God was the Word
St. John 1.1
 .

13
Reflexive Pronouns
and Possessives;
Intensive Pronoun

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lessonyou should be able to

7. Define, recognize, form, and translate "reflexive pronouns" and "re-

flexive possessive adjectives."

2. Define, recognize, form, and translate the "intensive pronoun."

Be sure that you have thoroughly studied

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque!
Chapter 13 of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabu-
and memorized the new paradigms and vocabulary by repeating
lary, the
words aloud. Remember: SI Latlnam diligetis, semper eritis fortunati!

GRAMMATICA
1 Since reflexive pronouns by definition to the
they cannot serve as the
, of finite verbs
and therefore lack the case.

2. The first and second person reflexive pronouns are identical to the
personal pronouns (except in the one case indicated above). T/F

Name: Section: Date:

 .

700 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 13

3. The forms of the third person reflexive most resemble those of

a. ego b. tu c. is d. ipse

4. In English translation the third person reflexive pronoun must reflect

both the and the of the subject.

5. In Enghsh, both the reflexive and the intensive pronouns end with
the suffix

6. The and second person reflexive possessive adjectives are

first identi-
and second person possessives already
cal to the regular first
learned. T/F

7. The third person reflexive possessive must agree with the noun it
modifies in , and
, but in ,

English translation must reflect the and

of the subject.

8. The intensive pronoun follows the declensional pattern of magnus, -a,

-um, except in the singular and cases.

9. In English translation the intensive pronoun must reflect the empha-

sized word's
a. number b. gender c. person d. all these

10. List in order and identify the number, case, and grammatical use of
the three reflexive pronouns in this chapter's Sententiae AntTquae 5-8
(e.g., se [sentence 1], singular, accusative, object of the preposition
ante).

Reflexive (Sent. No.) Number Case Use

c.

1 1 . Give all the possible meanings, both personal and reflexive.

a. mihi

b. vobis

c. se

d. tibi

e. me
f. sibi
 Reflexive Pronouns and Possessives; Intensive Pronoun 101

12. Decline the Latin intensive pronoun in the singular only.

Masculine Feminine Neuter

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

EXERCITATIONES
A. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. Nam quisque patrem (reflexive possessive) dllexit.

2. Caesar, autem, (ace. reflexive) cum eodem consule

nuper iunxerat.

3. Ante bellum, c5piae eorum se cum amlcls (his) in

Asia iunxerunt.

4. Medica (nom. intensive) de prlncipio morbl mul-

tum intellexit.

B. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . The young man's mother sent him great riches, but saved nothing
for herself

Section: Date:
102 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 13

2. Caesar himself was standing there for a long time before his own
troops.

3. Nevertheless, the doctor said nothing about himself and his own
deeds yesterday.

Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new sentence.

1. Vir se culpavit.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Matres se culpaverant.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Ego me servabo.

Transformation: _

Translation:

Consul ipse me laudabat.

Transformation:

Translation:

Soror sibi donum dederat.

Transformation:

Translation:

Tu ipsa factum eius laudas.

Transformation:

Translation:
 Reflexive Pronouns and Possessives; Intensive Pronoun 103

7. Filium suum docet.

Transformation:

Translation:

8. Patres signa sua vTderunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary hst.

1. Some Latin nouns produce Enghsh derivatives by simply drop-

ping the nominative case ending; e.g., verbum > "verb." List two
such English derivatives from this chapter's vocabulary list.

2. Which adverb does not have a related meaning?

a. ante b. bene c. nuper d. olim

3. Which adjective is nearly synonymous with fortunatus?

a. acerbus b. amicus c. beatus d. doctus

4. Which conjunction has a meaning in common with nam?

a. autem b. enim c. nee d. -que

5. Which verb is similar in meaning to diligo?

a. ago b. alo c. amo d. cado
6. Complete the analogy multus : nullus : : doctus :

a. cams b. sanus c. stultus d. suus

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1. An animal receives through its "alimentary" canal.

2. A "conjunction" literally one item

another.

3. An "antebellum" home was built the

4. Something "permanent" many years.

Name: Section: Dale:

 :

104 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 13

LECTIONES
A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as Uterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . In prlncipio Deus homines in forma sua creavit.

2. Quod divitias amiserat, pater ipse nee filias nee filios suos alere
potuit.

3. Ea femina nullum timorem sensit sed, propter virtutem, se

necavit.

4. Etiam post multos annos nemo patientiam eius laudat.

5. Ille adulescens doctus multa per se et laborem suum didicerat.

6. Pr5 patria Caesarl ipsT multum dederamus, sed nobis nihil de-
dimus.

7. Reglna ipsa 51im erat caput patriae suae in Asia.

8. Ego te dUigo, arnica mea, sed dUigisne te ipsam?

B. Answer these questions on 'Alexander the Great" and "Authority of a

Teacher's Opinion."

1 . Complete the analogy, Alexander : scrlptores : : Achilles

2. Quid litterae magnae viro magno dare possunt?

a. multa facta b. magna fortuna
c. fama perpetua d. corpus sanum
 Reflexive Pronouns and Possessives; Intensive Pronoun 105

3. Quando magistn docti discipulls sententias suas dlcere debent?

a. hodie b. non semper c. saepe d. semper

4. Ubi veritatem inveniemus?

a. in disputationibus b. in philosophia
c. in sententia d. in ratione

Labor ipse voluptas: Work itself (is) a pleasure

Manilius

Name: Section: Date:

14
l-Stem Nouns of the Third
Declension; Ablatives of
Means, Accompaniment,
and Manner

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Distinguish between "i-stem nouns" and "consonant-stem nouns" of
the third declension.
2. Recognize, form, and translate third declension i-stem nouns, including
the irregular noun vTs.

3. Define, distinguish among, and translate ablatives of "means," "accom-

paniment," and "manner." k
Be sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter
Salvete, discipulae discipulique!
14 of Wheelock's Latin before attempting these exercises. And remember to
memorize paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. Semper
discite cum studio et voluptate!
 I-Stem Nouns of the Third Declension; Ablatives of Means, Accompaniment, and Manner 107

GRAMMATICA

1. All third declension i-stems differ from consonant stems in

the plural case, which has the ending

In addition, neuter i-stems differ from consonant stems in

the singular case, which ends with
instead of , and in the ,

and plural, which end with instead

of

3. Which does not describe a category of i-stem nouns?

a. neuters with nominatives ending in -e, -al, or -ar
b. masculine and feminine nouns with nominatives in -is or -es and
the same number of syllables in both the nominative and genitive
singular
c. neuters with monosyllabic nominatives in -um or -us and a base
ending in two consonants
d. masculine and feminine nouns with nominatives in -s or -x and a
base ending in two consonants

4. Which two third declension nouns in the chapter's vocabulary list are
not i-stems?

5. Identify the base and gender of urbs antlqua, the ancient city, decline
it fully, and provide the English meanings appropriate to each case.

base: gender:

Singular
Latin English

Nom. urbs antlqua the ancient city

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Name: Section: Dale:

108 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 14

Plural

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

6. Decline animal bellum, the beautiful animal, and provide the English
meanings.

Singular
Latin English

Nom. animal bellum the beautiful animal

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

7. Decline both vir and vTs, with English meanings.

Singular
Latin English Latin English

Nom. vir the man vis force

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.
 .

I-Stem Nouns of the Third Declension; Ablatives of Means, Accompaniment, and Manner 109

Plural

Nnm.

r;«>n

Tint

Acc-

Ahl

8. Match.
He wrote the letter

with a pen a. ablative of accompaniment

with a friend b. ablative of manner
with care c. ablative of means

9. Match.
with whom a. ablative of accompaniment
with what b. ablative of manner
how c. ablative of means

10. Which ablative case usage never requires a preposition?

a. accompaniment b. manner c. means d. all these

1 1 Translate and indicate the type of ablative case usage.

Translation Type of Ablative

a. with a citizen

b. by death

c. with patience

d. with skill

e. by sea

f iure

g. cum cTvibus

h. auribus mels

i. cum cura

j. cum medicTs

Name: Section: Datt

 .

/ 10 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 14

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

Transformation Translation

1 . cum cTvibus doctls

2. factls (abl.) eorum

3. cum patre eius

4. eo signo (abl.)

5. parvae partis

B. Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (e.g., puella fortuna > fortuna puellae, the

girl's fortune).

Transformation Translation

1 vis ars

2. partes urbes

3. Caesar mors

4. dlvitiae matres

5. annus principium

C. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. CTves illarum (urbs) bellum acerbum diu gerebant.

2. Cum (virtus) et patientia mortem toleraverunt.

3. Adulescentes ipsos trans (mare; pi.) mlserat.

4. Nam totam urbem (vis; sg.) nuper tenebant.

5. Agricola stultus (animal) sua pro pecunia necavit.

 .

I-Stem Nouns of the Third Declension; Ablatives of Means, Accompaniment, and Manner 111

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. The young men stood before Caesar with courage.

2. The boy and girl were running into the water with their friends.

3. The father can support himself and his daughter with his own
money.

4. The force of the seas restrained them yesterday.

5. The mob dragged the tyrant across the street and through the city.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Some Latin nouns produce English derivatives by simply drop-

ping the genitive case ending; e.g., virgo, virginis > "virgin." List
two such English derivatives from this chapter's vocabulary
list

2. Which does not belong?

a. auris b. basium c. oculus d. os

3. Which noun is an antonym of mors?

a. animal b. caput c. vis d. vita

4. Which verb is an antonym of teneo?

a. amitto b. cado c. creo d. habeo

5. Which English word is not related to the Latin word? (Use a

good English dictionary, if necessary, to answer these.)
a. mors: a. moratorium b. mortal c. mortify d. mortgage
b. vis: a. inviolate b. vim c. violent d. virile

c. curro: a. cure b. current c. incur d. recur

Name: Section: Date.

112 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 14

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., 'A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 . A "subaqueous" creature lives

2. Something "inevitable" can be , and

something "immutable" can be

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as Hterally as
possible within the limits of sound Enghsh idiom.

1 . Medicus ipse totam veritatem ore suo dixit, et ego verba eius auri-
bus mels audlvT.

2. Propter illas nubes et timorem maris, nautae in Asia remanebant.

3. Romam antlquam semper appellabimus urbem magnam pulch-

ramque.

4. Quisque mores suos mutaverat et ista vitia tum vTtabat.

5. Reges Romam olim tenuerunt et earn cum alils urbibus iunxerunt.

6. Quod consules civitatem magna cum sapientia gesserunt, eos

dlleximus.
i
 .

I-Stem Nouns of the Third Declension; Ablatives of Means, Accompaniment, and Manner 1 13

B. Answer these questions on "Store Teeth" and "The Catilinarian Con-

spirators."

1 Quis ( Who) dentes emptos habet?

a. Thais b. Laecania c. Martial d. all of them

2. Quare sunt dentes alterlus feminae nigrl?

a. suos habet b. emptos habet c. ea est bella d. all these

3. What is peculiar in the word order of each of the two phrases

Thais . . . nigrds, niveos Laecania and Emptds haec ilia su5s,
. . .

and what is the purpose of this arrangement?

4. Quid Cicero agere debet?

a. poenas dare b. amicos CatilTnae ad mortem ducere
c. cogitare malos esse cTves d. istos numquam morte multare

5. ST Cicero amicos CatilTnae multabit, Roma eT

dabit.

Ars artium omnium conservatrix: The art (that is) preserver of all arts
Motto of the profession of printers

Name: Section: Date:

15
Numerals; Genitive of the
Whole; Genitive and
Ablative with Cardinal
Numerals; Ablative of Time

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Explain the difference between "cardinal" and "ordinal" numerals.
2. Recognize and translate the cardinal numerals from unus through
vTgintT quTnque, as well as centum and mille.
3. Decline unus, duo, tres, and mille.
4. Recognize, decline, and translate the ordinal numerals from primus
through duodecimus.
5. Define, recognize, and translate the "genitive of the whole" (or "parti-

tive genitive" ) construction.

6. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative with cardinal numerals"

construction.
7. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative of time when or within
which" construction.

Salvete, discipulae discipulTque! Be sure you have learned the numerals and
new case constructions introduced in Chapter 15, before beginning these
 .

Numerals; Genitive of the Whole; Genitive and Ablative with Cardinal Numerals; Ablative of Time 1 15

exercises; remember to memorize the numerals, declensions, and vocabulary

by repeating the words aloud. Parvo tempore Latlnam bene intellegetis!

GRAMMATICA
1. The basic "counting" numbers (one, two. three, etc.) are called
while numerals used to indicate order of occurrence
are. quite aptly, called

2. Which does not belong?

a. quattuor b. sextus c. novem d. undevlgintl

3. Which does not belong?

a. unus b. secundus c. quTntus d. undecimus

4. Which is not declinable?

a. unus b. vlgintl c. ducentl d. milia

5. Decline duae nubes and tria animalia, in the plural only.

Nom. duae nubes tria animalia

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

6. Which can not be used with a genitive of the whole?

a. quTnque b. mHia c. pars d. nihil

7. Which phrase does not contain a genitive of the whole?

a. pars oris b. dlvitiae urbis c. nemo cTvium d. satis vTrium

8. Identify the three nouns used as genitives of the whole in Practice

and Review sentences 1-10.

9. Identify the two nouns used as ablatives with cardinal numerals in

Practice and Review 1-5.

10. Which English preposition is not an option for translating the

ablative of time construction?
a. at b. for c. on d. within

1 1 Identify the three nouns used as ablatives of time in Sententiae

Antiquae 1-9.

Name: Section: Date:

 . .

1 16 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 15

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate into Latin and identify the case and usage (e.g., with a
friend > cum amlco, ablative of accompaniment).

Translation Case and Usage

1 with six animals

2. enough wealth

3. in the water

4. in two hours

5. ten of the citizens

6. much (of) art

7. within four years

8. the city's streets

9. with httle care

10. with his own ears

B. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase or sentence.

1 illTs temporibus

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Tempestatem her! exspectavit.

Transformation:

Translation:

cum turbls miserls

Transformation:

Translation:

Mortes timebant.

Transformation: _

Translation:
 Numerals; Genitive of the Whole; Genitive and Ablative with Cardinal Numerals; Ablative of Time 117

C. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . Nam ill! miser! tempestatem (id tempus)

timebant.

2. Itaque Romam ipsam tribus ex (civis) olim com-

mlserunt.

3. Propter facta eius, nemo in Italia satis (ius; pi.) tenuit.

4. Caesar copias suas cum mllibus (nauta) trans maria

duxerat.

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . Within a few hours those fortunate men had thrown the tyrant
out of Italy.

2. You were entrusting part of the city to the two consuls.

3. Because of their deeds, we called six of those men friends.

4. They will at that time esteem thousands of these citizens.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

1 18 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 15

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary hst.

1. Gloria gives us English "glory"; what English derivatives are simi-

larly derived from the first declension nouns in this chapter's vo-
cabulary?

2. Which word has a meaning similar to that of itaque?

a. ante b. igitur c. olim d. trans

3. Which adjective is an antonym of miser?

a. acerbus b. doctus c. fortunatus d. stultus

4. The third declension -io noun . derives from the

fourth principal part of committo and literally means
or

5 Complete the analogy : centum : : decem unus.

:

6. Give the Latin numeral that indicates the total.

a. unus + septem: b. duo + quattuor:

c. novem + undecim: d. octo + decem:

7. Complete the series.

quTntus octavus nonus

decimus

8. The derivative of iacio that literally means "downcast" is

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. An event's "quincentennial" is celebrated

after it occurred.

2. A "projectile" is an object that has been

., something "ejected" has been
-, and a "trajectory" is the path such an object has
been

3. A "timorous" person is -ful.

 Numerals; Genitive of the Whole; Genitive and Ablative with Cardinal Numerals; Ablative of Time 119

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Quisque se memoria factorum bonorum eius aluerat.

2. Ante signum per vias urbis cucurrerunt et se cum aliis copils iunx-
erunt.

3. Quoniam nihil pecuniae tenuimus, consilia mutabamus.

4. Centum ex adulescentibus ante portam cum virtute steterunt, sed

exitium urbis non vTtare potuerunt.

5. Has magistras doctas, quod multum sapientiae inter se tenebant,

discipulae semper dlligebant.

6. PaucTs annls Roman! earn partem Italiae ceperant.

7. Vldistlne eo tempore patrem nostrum inter illos alios viros, ml

frater?

8. Quod eum non amabat, femina donum librosque poetae in viam

iecit.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

120 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 15

B. Answer these questions on "Cyrus' Dying Words" and "Fabian

Tactics."

1 Quis debet esse miser?

a. Cyrus b. Cicero c. filil Cyrl d. nemo
2. Cyrus est beatus quod
a. tres fTli5s habet b. animus suus erit perpetuus
c. corpus semper remanebit d. ftlil facta intellegebant

3. Fabius Maximus parvum virtutis et nihil animorum habuit. T/F

4. Quid Fabius ante patriam ponebat?

a. rumor b. fama c. gloria d. nihil

Vera amicitia est inter bonds: There is true friendship (only) among good men
Cicero
16
Third Declension Adjectives

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Distinguish among third declension adjectives of "one ending," "two
endings," and "three endings."
2. Recognize, form, and translate third declension adjectives.
3. Distinguish among adjectives used as "attributives" "objective comple-
ments," and "predicate nominatives."
4. State the rule for adjective word order

Whenever you turn to the exercises in this

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque!
workbook, you should have already thoroughly studied the corresponding
chapter of Wheelock's Latin, especially the new grammar and vocabulary
and even the Latlna Est Gaudium section. And remember always to memo-
rize paradigms and vocabulary by repeating the words aloud. ST LatTnam

dlligetis, amlcT et amicae, eritis omnipotentes!

GRAMMATICA

1. Most third declension adjectives are declined like i-stem nouns,

except that the case ends in the singular with
in all three genders.

Name: Section: Date:

122 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 16

2. Third declension adjectives of three endings are so called because

they have different endings for each of the three genders in the
case.

3. The majority of third declension adjectives are those of

a. one ending b. two endings c. three endings d. none of these

4. The masculine and feminine forms of third declension adjectives of

two or three endings differ from the neuter forms only in the
, and , cases, singular and
plural.

5. Match.
elves sunt beat! a. attributive
sapientia fecit cTves beatos b. objective complement
cTves beatos dUigimus c. predicate nominative

6. Attributive adjectives are usually placed the nouns they

modify, except
a. those denoting size or quantity b. demonstratives
c. for emphasis d. all these

7. Third declension adjectives can modify nouns of the

a. first declension b. second declension
c. third declension d. all these

8. The base of any third declension adjective can be found by dropping

the case ending.

9. Identify the base and gender of mens potens, a powerful mind, decline
in the singular only, and provide the English meanings appropriate to
each case.

base: gender:

Latin English

Nom. mens potens

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

10. Identify the base and gender of satura acris, a harsh satire, and
decline in the plural only.
 .

Third Declension Adjectives 123

base: gender:

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

1 1 . Identify the base and gender of animal ingens, a huge animal, and
decline fully.

base: gender:

Singular Plural

Nom. animal ingens

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

12. Choose the correct form of the third declension adjective and then
translate the entire phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. aetate (brief)

b. artium (difficult)

c. tempestates (powerful)

d. auditor! (every)

e. aquarum (sweet)

f. clementiam (pleasant)

g. maria (fierce)

h. nubium (swift)

i. urbl (brave)

j. carmina (easy)

Name: Section- Date:

 .

124 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 16

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following.

1 . omni man
2. omnium partium
3. omnia nomina

4. Italiam potentem

5. omnl arte

6. omnium bellorum
7. Roma potent!

8. mortis celeris

9. aure acrl

10. omnia iura

1 1 omnl art! _
12. dulcT puellae

13. vTcelerT

14. OS omne
15. omnium regum
16. turbae acris

B. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. Memoriae (dulcis) senectiitem iuvant.

2. Quam (celer) sunt aetates nostrae!

3. Senex duos amicos (miser) filiorum (fortis)

exspectabat.

4. Itaque Romam semper appellabimus urbem (potens).

 Third Declension Adjectives 125

C. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1. Animal acre tenuit.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Aetates breves timebatis.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Trans mare difficile her! fUgit.

Transformation:

Translation:

4. Mentibus celeribus regunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

5. Fortis eras non curret.

Transformation:

Translation:

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . We had many memories of a difficult life.

2. In a short period of time the fierce war had changed all the citizens.

3. Within three hours you expected all your friends.

4. They found strength in the pleasant woman's courage.

Name: Section: Date:

126 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 16

Vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Many Latin third declension adjectives form feminine abstract

nouns by adding -itas (genitive -itatis) to the base; these Latin
words in turn often produce English derivatives in "-ity" (e.g.,
celer > celeritas, -tatis, f , speed, swiftness, English "celerity"). Pro-
vide the indicated information for the following adjectives from
this chapter's vocabulary.

Latin Noun Meaning Derivative

a. brevis

b. facilis

2. The masculine noun from rego meaning one who rules, directs is

a. rectio b. rectus c. rector d. regendus

3. An "acrimonious" person is

a. bitter b. guiltless c. wealthy d. protective

4. Which noun is nearly synonymous with mens?

a. animus b. culpa c. fama d. remedium

5. Using a third declension adjective, complete the analogy

difficilis : facilis : : longus :

a. brevis b. dulcis c. ingens d. omnis

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. "Inclement" weather is Hterally

2. An "omnivorous" animal eats things.

3. To "facihtate" a task is to make it

4. An "omnipotent" force is -
 Third Declension Adjectives 127

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Aetas difficilis, autem, potest esse beata.

2. Quam brevis erat dulcis vita eius!

3. In omnT terra viros feminasque fortes videbitis.

4. PerTcula ingentia paucTs hdrls superavimus.

5. Itaque audltores acres poetae potent! mentes commlserunt.

6. Inter amlcos nihil est nimium difficile.

7. Ille vir fortis animalia acria ex porta urbis iecit.

8. Omnes stultT laborem pro vita facili vitabant.

B. Answer these questions on "Juvenal Explains His Impulse to Satire"

and "On a Temperamental Friend."

1. Quid erit luvenalis (Juvenal)?

a. auditor b. poeta c. satura d. indignatio

2. Quid luvenalis scribet?

a. carmina iucunda b. liber de amore
c. saturae acres d. saturae dulces

3. Quid urbs Roma habet?

a. multT poetae b. multa vitia c. multl mail d. omnia haec

4. The overall tone of Juvenal's introduction is

a. optimistic b. cynical c. joyful d. forgiving

Name: Section: Dale:

128 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 16

5. Whom does Martial address in his epigram?

a. a close friend b. an enemy
c. a casual acquaintance d. a girlfriend

6. Which rhetorical or poetic device is exploited in the poem?

a. metaphor b. simile c. antithesis d. onomatopoeia

7. Potestne poeta sine amlco suo esse beatus?

a. potest b. non potest c. non dicit d. semper

Dulce et dec5rum est pro patria mori:

A sweet and decorous thing it is to die for one's country

Horace
 17
The Relative Pronoun

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Define and explain the function of a "relative pronoun."
2. State the rule for the agreement of a relative pronoun and its "ante-
cedent."
3. Recognize, form, and translate a relative pronoun.

Salve, discipula aut discipule! Before attempting these exercises, be sure you
have thoroughly studied Chapter 17 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the declension of qui, quae, quod and the new vocabulary by repeating
them aloud. Disce omnia quae sunt in hdc libello, et eris beatus (aut beata)!

CRAMMATICA
1. A relative pronoun introduces a type of clause known as
a "relative clause" and refers back to a noun or pronoun (i.e., a per-
son or thing) called its

2. The relative clause itself functions

a. adverbially b. adjectivally c. verbally d. as a noun

3. The term "antecedent" means literally someone or something that

has

Name: Seciion: Date:

 .

130 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 17

4. A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in every respect

except
a. number b. gender c. case d. none of these

5. The of a relative pronoun is determined by its use in its

own clause.

6. Dechne the relative pronoun in the masculine gender only and provide
the Enghsh meanings (note that the genitive may be translated either
of whom or whose).
Singular Plural
Latin English Latin English

Nom. qui who

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Identify the gender, number, case, use, and antecedent of these five

relative pronouns in Sententiae Anfiquae 1-4.

Gender Number Case Use Antecedent

a. cui (1)

b. quo (2)

c. quae (3, first

occurrence)

d. quae (3, second

occurrence)

e. qui (4)

EXERCITATIONES
A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1 mens celeris quam

2. libellos quos

3. Italia trans quam

. * s't^.i:
 .

The Rela five Pronoun 131

4. dementia pro qua

5. audltorum inter quos

6. ilia aetate post quam .

7. saturas de quibus

8. Caesarem cui

9. adulescenti cuius

10. aquas sub quibus

11. the state (subj.) which (dir. obj.)

12. the daughter (dir. obj.) whose

13. the seas (dir. obj.) across which

14. the little books (subj.) in which

15. the sister (subj.) to whom

16. the citizen (dir. obj.) who
17. the friends (dir. obj.) with whom
18. the memory (subj.) which (subj.)

19. the brothers (subj.) whom

20. the mothers (dir. obj.) who
B. Supply the correct form of the relative pronoun and translate.

1 Aetas de dixistT erat nimium difficiUs.

2. Ubi sunt omnes audltores tum exspectabas?

3. Timebant decem saturas potentes ille fortis nuper

scrlpserat.

4. Matrem iucundam, quattuor fTlil miser! ex tem-

pestate acrl fugerant, ibi vldl.

Name: Section: Dale

132 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 17

5. Amicus, filiam dulcem commlseramus, earn neg-

legebat.

Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1 . mare trans quod navigas

Transformation:

Translation:

saturas quas recitaverunt

Transformation:

Translation:

3. urbis quam deleverat

Transformation:

Translation:

4. rosa quam iaciebas

Transformation:

Translation:

D. Transform the two simple sentences into a single complex sentence by

replacing the personal pronoun with a relative pronoun, and then
translate the new sentence (e.g., Caesar fuit c5nsul. Eum laudavT. >
Caesar fuit consul quem laudavT, Caesar was the consul whom I praised).

1 . Italia est terra bella. Eam videre desldero.

Transformation:

Translation:

Ilia septem carmina brevia quoque audire cupTvT. Ea ille poeta

scrTpserat.

Transformation:

Translation:

Tyrannus civitatem regebat. Ad eam navigare coeperas.

Transformation:

Translation:
 The Relative Pronoun 133

4. Magistra discipulos nunc admittere incipit. Matres eorum dlligis.

Transformation:

Translation:

E. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. The tyrant whom we feared is evil.

2. You will quickly lead into Italy those troops with whom you came.

3. He is beginning to destroy the sweet friendship which we have.

4. They neglected the two blind men whose deeds were great.

5. The new age which is now beginning will be happy.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1. Identify the third declension -io noun derived from the fourth
principal part of the following verbs, and then give their direct
English derivatives and their meanings.

Latin Noun Eng, Noun Translation

a. deleo

b. incipio

c. navigo

d. recito

2. What noun formed from

third declension the fourth principal
part of navigo means one who sails']

Name: Section: Date:

134 Workbook for Wbeelock^s Latin: Chapter 17

3. On the analogy of brevis > brevitas > "brevity," provide the

indicated words.
levis > >
4. Which adjective is most closely related in meaning to levis?
a. dulcis b. faciUs c. ingens d. longus

5. Which verb is an antonym of admittd?

a. committo b. emitto c. submitto d. transmitto

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1. To "alleviate" a burden is to make it

2. An "indelible" memory can be

3. A Ust of "desiderata" itemizes things a person

4. The Roman deity "Cupid" was god of

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as hterally as
possible within the limits of sound Enghsh idiom.

1 . Quam iucundl sunt illT tres libelli quos mihi nuper mlsisti!

2. Itaque milia harum c5piarum, quibus Caesar clementiam dedit,

aut officia neglegunt aut ea non intellegunt.

3. Centum ex virls quibuscum trans maria difficilia navigaveras ad

urbem veniebant.
 The Relative Pronoun 135

4. Quod magister senex fuit caecus, dona dulcia quae discipulT mlse-
rant non bene videre poterat.

5. Levis est labor quern bene toleramus.

6. Qvem quoque laudaverunt cuius fflius fortis patriam cum virlute

servaverat.

7. Tyrannus duas urbes cito delevit in quas elves miser! fugerant.

8. Viro fort! cuius filiam caram amas vTtam suam sine timdre
commlsit.

B. Answer these questions on "The Pleasures of Love" and "It's All in

the Delivery."

1 . est minor in senectute.

a. voluptas b. cupiditas c. amor d. haec omnia

2. Quando, in sententia Ciceronis, aetatem iucundam habemus?

a. ubi sumus adulescentes b. ubi sumus senes
c. ubi nimis desTderamus d. ubi multas cupiditates habemus

3. Ubi FTdentTnus carmina alterlus poetae male recitat, facit ea

a. dulcia b. iucunda c. eius d. sua

4. What does this epigram imply about the importance of proper

delivery when reciting poetry?

Fortuna caeca est: Fortune is blind

Cicero

Name: Section: Date:

18
First and Second
Conjugations: Passive Voice
of the Present System;
Ablative of Agent

INTELLECENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Explain the difference between "active voice" and "passive voice."
2. Identify the personal endings for the passive voice of the three present
system tenses.

3. Recognize, form, and translate the present system tenses, passive voice,

offirst and second conjugation verbs.

4. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative of agent" construction.

Salve amice aut arnica! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you have
thoroughly studied Chapter 18 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized both the
verb paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them aloud. SI hoc
caput cum cura leges, a magistro aut magistra in tempus perpetuum lau-
daberis!
 First and Second Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System; Ablative of Agent 137

GRAMMATICA

1 . In the active voice the subject the .; in the

passive voice the subject the

Passive endings are substituted for active endings except in the

person singular of the and
tenses, where the passive ending is to the
active ending.

The consonant appears in five of the six passive

endings.

4. Which of the following forms is an exception to the general rule for

forming passives?
a. delebitur b. desTderaberis c. videbimur d. movebiminl

5. Give the active or passive equivalents.

a. -tis b. -bamur c. -buntur d. -bo

6. Which form contains a macron error?

a. miscet b. miscent c. miscetur d. miscentur

7. Conjugate amo, amare, in the present, future, and imperfect passive

indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

2.

3.

Imperfect
Singular Plural

2.

3.

Same: Section: Date:

138 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 18

8. Translate the above conjugation of amo, amare, in the present, future,

and imperfect passive indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Imperfect
Singular Plural

Conjugate the indicated verbs in the present, future, and imperfect

passive indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

1. moveor videbor

Imperfect
Singular Plural

1. delebar

10. Supply the missing active or passive equivalents and translate.

Active Translation Passive Translation

a. recitare

b. delerl

c. desTderarT

d. miscere

e. movere

...-k^sii'T
 First and Second Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System; Ablative of Agent 139

1 1 . Identify, in order, the six passive verbs in Practice and Review

sentences 1-6 and then give their active equivalents.

Passive Active Passive Active

a b

c d

e f.

12. In general which type verb is found in the passive?

a. transitive b. intransitive c. linking d. all these

13. In passive sentence types the ablative of indicates the

person by whom an action is performed, while the ablative of
indicates the thing by which an action is performed.

14. In converting an active sentence construction to a passive one, the

object becomes the , the subjectbecomes an ablative
of or , and the appropriate
verb form is substituted for the form.

15. Transform the following active sentence to passive without altering

the sense of the action, and then translate both active and passive
versions.

Active Passive

Latin: Hostis copias movet.

English:

16. Identify the two ablatives of agent in Practice and Review sentences
1^
17. Provide the information indicated for the following ablative case uses.

Latin preposition Used for people

(if none, so indicate) and/or things?

a. means/instrument

b. accompaniment

c. manner

d. time

e. cardinal numerals

r personal agent

Name: . Section: Date:

140 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 18

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into Latin or English.

1. delebitur 2. it was mixed

3. deslderabuntur 4. you (sg.) were moved

5. creantur 6. we will seem

7. exspectaminl 8. they are recited

9. satiabamur 10. you (pi.) will be frightened

B. Supply the correct passive form of the words in parentheses, and

translate.

1. In Itido omnes puellae hodie (docere; pres.).

2. Duo puerl a magistro non eras (movere; fut.).

3. Quattuor ex urbibus a copils acribus (delere; impf ).

4. Brevis mora consihorum a nobis her! (exspectare;

impf).

C. Transform the following active sentences to passive without altering

the sense of the action, and then translate.

1 . DiscipulT carmina facilia cito recitabant.

Transformation:

Translation:
 .

First and Second Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System; Ablative of Agent 141

2. Magistra secunda probitatem tuam quoque laudabit.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Deinde tria dona ad alium locum movebimus.

Transformation:

Translation:

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. The school will be changed quickly by this difficult plan.

2. We were not helped by that type of knowledge.

3. Why is he not affected even by his own brave old father?

4. You will not be feared either by your citizens or by your enemies.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Many Latin first declension nouns in -ntia give us English deriva-

tives in "-nee" (e.g., patientia > "patience"); what English word
similarly derives from scientia?

2. On the analogy of brevis > brevitas > "brevity," provide the indi-
cated words.
mortalis > >
3. Which adverb does not have a related meaning?
a. eras b. herT c. hodie d. quam
4. Which adverb has a meaning similar to cur?
a.quam b. quando c. quoque d. quare

Name: Section: Date:

742 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 18

5. Complete the analogy probitas:vitiuni:: : hostis.

a. aetas b. amicus c. dementia d. copiae

6. Give the third declension -or and -io nouns derived from the
fourth principal part of moveo, their meanings, and their
literal di-
rect English derivatives.

Meaning Derivative

a. -or:

b. -io:

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. "Hostile" actions are generally exhibited by an

2. An "immiscible" compound is able to be

and an "illegible" script is

to be

3. The "confluence" of two streams is the place at which they

4. To "demote" someone is hterally to him

in rank, and to "degenerate" is to move from one's
original

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as hterally as
possible within the limits of sound EngUsh idiom.

1 . LibrI huius generis puerls a magistro dabantur sed paucT lege-

bantur.

2. PaucTs horls ilia flumina celeria in mare ingens fluere coeperant.

 First and Second Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System; Ablative of Agent 143

3. Mentes omnium audltorum tertia satura illTus poetae clarl move-

bantur.

4. Quod discipulos in ludum non admlsit, ad aliam urbem aut cTvita-

tem mover! cupTverunt.

5. Quoniam numquam iaudabantur, etiam ilia studia levia neglegere

incipiebant.

6. Fortuna caeca regit mentes eorum qui cum cura non docentur.

7. Omnes memoria dulcT aetatum iucundarum movemur.

8. Post tempus longum, hos libellos difficiles legere poteris.

B. Answer these questions on "Death and Metamorphosis."

1. Quid homines nimis timent? (Responde in tota sententia.)

2. Quid omnia non faciunt?

a. se mutant b. fluunt c. ad mortem veniunt d. errant

3. Ubi est animus post mortem?

a. in alils corporibus b. in prlmo corpore
c. in eadem forma d. in nuUo loco

4. Quid eras erimus?

a. quod her! fuimus b. quod hodie sumus c. nihil d. non eldem

Genus est mortis male vivere: 7o live wickedly is a kind oj death

Ovid

Name: Section: Dale:

19
Perfect Passive System of
All Verbs; Interrogative
Pronouns and Adjectives

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Recognize, form, and translate the three perfect system tenses, passive
voice, of all verbs.
" interrogative pronoun" and an
2. Define and explain the function of an
"interrogative adjective."
3. Recognize, form, and translate the interrogative pronoun quis, quid,

and the interrogative adjective qui, quae, quod.

Salve, discipule docte aut discipula docta! Before beginning these exercises,
be sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter 19 of Wheelock's Latin and
memorized both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them
aloud. Quem librum hodie leges amabisque? — hunc iibrum!

GRAMMATICA
1 . The Latin perfect passive indicative is composed of the
and the tense of esse.

irr
 Perfect Passive System of All Verbs; Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives 145

2. The Latin future perfect passive indicative is composed of the

and the
tense of esse.

3. The Latin pluperfect passive indicative is composed of the

and the
tense of esse.

4. Conjugate amo, amare, in the perfect, future perfect, and pluperfect

passive indicative.

Perfect Fut. Perf.

Singular Plural Singular Plural

Pluperfect
Singular Plural

5. Translate the above conjugation of amo, amare, in the perfect, future

perfect, and pluperfect passive indicative.

Perfect Fut. Perf.

Singular Plural Singular Plural

Pluperfect
Singular Plural

Name: Scrtinn HntP

146 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 19

6. Conjugate the indicated verbs in the perfect, future perfect, and

pluperfect passive indicative.

Perfect, Ilberare Fut. Perf., movere

Singular Plural Singular Plural

Pluperfect, neglegere
Singular Plural

7. Identify, in order, the three perfect system passive verbs in Practice

and Review sentences 1-8 and then give their active equivalents.

Passive Active

a.

c.

8. Transform the following active sentence to passive without altering

the sense of the action, and then translate both active and passive
versions.

Active Passive

Latin: ludex argumenta certa paravit.

English:

9. The interrogative pronoun asks for the general of a

or

10. The interrogative adjective asks for the

of a or

11. A relative pronoun and its clause identify or provide further

information about a or
 Perfect Passive System of All Verbs; Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives 147

12. Which is not identical to the others in the singular?

a. relative pronoun b. interrogative pronoun
c. interrogative adjective d. none of these

13. Which is not identical to the others in the plural?

a. relative pronoun b. interrogative pronoun
c. interrogative adjective d. none of these

14. Complete the chart, showing distinctions between the relative

pronoun and the interrogative pronoun and adjective.

Sentence
Expressed ends with
Modifies or implied Introduces question
noun antecedent question mark
(yes/no) (has/has not) (yes/no) (yes/no)

a. relative pronoun

b. interrogative pron.

c. interrogative adj.

15. Identify the type (relative pronoun, interrogative pronoun,

interrogative adjective), case, and grammatical use of the indicated
words in the Practice and Review sentences (e.g., Quis [sent. 1],
interrogative pronoun, nominative, subject).

Type Case Use

a. Cuius (2)

b. Quos (3)

c. quos (4)

d. quod (6)

e. qua (8)

f Qui (10)

g. quo (10)

h. Quae (11,
first occurrence)

i. Quae (11,
second
occurrence)

Name: Section: Date:

148 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 19

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into Latin or English.

1 . Beneficia laudata erunt.

2. FamiUae admissae sunt.

3. Flumen demonstratum erat.

4. Libellus recitatus est.

5. Hostis vTsus erit.

6. The arguments have been prepared.

7. The authors had been delighted.

8. The city has been destroyed.

9. The judgment will have been made.

10. The poems had been read.

B. Transform the following active sentences to passive without altering

the sense of the action, and then translate.

1 . Senes id genus ludorum non dllexerant.

Transformarion:

Translation:
 .

Perfect Passive System of All Verbs; Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives 149

2. MultT virl fortes haec maria navigaverunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Auctor bonus multos libros legerit.

Transformation:

Translation:

C. Supply the correct form of the interrogative adjective and translate.

Translation

1 probitatem

2. scientia

3. scelerum

4. iiidicT

5. argumentls (abl.)

D. Supply the correct form of the interrogative pronoun and translate.

Translation

1 id cupTvit?

2 (dat.) libellum dedisti?

3. A (sg.) iTberati sunt?

4. ab els paratum est?

5. (gen. pi.) dona desTderas?

E. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. Una hora iudicium ab hoste (dare; plupf pass.).

2. A (quis; pi.) ilia argumenta hen

(incipere; perf pass.)?

3. BrevT tempore ab iudice (ITberare; 1st pers. pi. fui.

perf pass.).

Name: Section: Date:

 . .

150 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 19

(quis; gen. pi.) scelera deinde

(demonstrare; plupf. pass.)?

F. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include macrons.

1 . The old man also had been neglected by his family.

2. By what new game had they been delighted?

3. At what time will she have been expected tomorrow?

4. By what name were you called then?

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Many first declension -ia nouns produce English derivatives in

"-y" (e.g., gldria > formed
"glory"); identify the derivatives so
from the following nouns.

a. familia b. victoria
c. philosophia d. memoria
e. Italia

2. Give the third declension -or and -io nouns derived from the
fourth principal part of Iibero, their literal meanings, and their
direct English derivatives.

Meaning Derivative

a. -or:

b. -io:

3 Complete the analogy mortalis immortalis : : : gravis :

a. caecus b. clarus c. ingens d. levis

4. Which adverb is nearest in meaning to iam?

a. cito b. cur c. nunc d. olim
 .

Perfect Passive System of All Verbs; Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives 151

5. Which conjunction is nearest in meaning to at?

a. aut b. et c. nisi d. sed

B. Complete each statement with an EngHsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 A "beneficent person" things for

others.

2. Those who are "prejudiced" others

they truly know them.

3. To "contradict" someone is to him.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. ludex a quo iudicium paratum est labore iam superatur.

2. At senem cuius familia servata erat numquam vidi.

3. A cTve qui ad Graeciam missus erat pax et iTbertas laudatae sunt.

4. Quid auctorl dictum est cui ea beneficia data sunt?

5. Aquae celeres ex fluminibus fluxerant et cum marl ingenti mixtae

erant.

6. Quae argumenta certa a iudicibus contra ista scelera gravia eras

parata erunt?

Name: Section: Date:

152 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 19

7. Nisi familiae nostrae iTberatae erunt, nihil nos delectabit. \

8. Quis haec iudicia parare coeperat aut qui iudex ea parare etiam
potuerat?

B. Answer these questions on "Catullus Bids Farewell" and "The Aged

Playwright."

1. Cur est poeta miser?

a. puella eum non amat b. puella est nimis bella
c. puella eum semper basiat d. puella obdurat

2. In sententia poetae, cui puella videbitur pulchra?

a. Catullo b. Lesbiae c. neminl d. omnibus

3. Quis est auctor huius loci de senibus?

a. Cicero b. Sophocles c. Oedipus d. iudex

4. Quid senes sani in mentibus habent?

a. memoria b. scientia c. sapientia d. haec omnia

5. Quid Sophocles scrlpsit?

a. De Senectute b. tragoediae c. iudicia d. haec omnia

6. Cur Sophocles familiam neglegere visus est?

a. multa diu scrlbebat b. in iudicium vocatus est
c. propter scelera gravia d. iudicibus recitaverat

7. Quando "Oedipus Coloneus" a Sophocle scrlptus erat?

a. nuper b. olim c. diu d. heri

8. Cur ille auctor ab iudicibus liberatus est?

a. propter argumenta certa
b. quod familiam non neglexerat
c. quoniam tragoedia eos delectavit
d. quod fuit senex

Sed quis custodiet ipsos custodes: But who will guard the guards themselves?
Juvenal

.fKM
 20
Fourth Declension;
Ablatives of Place from
Which and Separation

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. and translate fourth declension nouns.
Recognize, form,
2. and translate the "ablative of place from which" and
Define, recognize,
"ablative of separation" constructions, and distinguish between the two.
3. Recognize and translate certain verbs that commonly take an ablative

of separation.

Salve, discipula aut discipule! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you
have thoroughly studied Chapter 20 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them aloud. ST hoc
caput cum cura disces, sapientia numquam carebis!

GRAMMATICA
1. All the endings of fourth declension nouns begin with the letter

except the and plural.

Name: Section: Date:

154 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 20

2. The gender of most fourth declension nouns is , but

some are and a very few are

3. The ablative of place from which generally requires a verb indicat-

ing from one place to another and one of the preposi-
tions , , or

4. The ablative of separation may or may not require a and

generally is not used with a verb of , but simply indicates
that one person or thing is from another.

5. Which of the following verbs does not commonly take an ablative of

separation?
a. careo b. disced© c. ITbero d. prohibeo

6. Identify the base and gender of manus dextra, right hand, decline it
fully, and provide the English meanings appropriate to each case,
base: gender:

Singular
Latin English

Nom. manus dextra the right hand

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

7. Identify the base and gender of genu sinistrum, left knee, and decline it

fully

base: gender:
 Fourth Declension; Ablatives of Place from Which and Separation 155

Singular Plural

Nom. genu sinistrum

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

8. Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. fructul (sweet)

b. metuum (serious)

c. senatu (Roman)

d. sensus (gen.; common)

e. spTritum (immortal)

f versus (ace; three)

Identify the number, gender, case, and grammatical use of these

nouns and pronouns in the chapter's Practice and Review sentences
(e.g., senes [sentence 1], plural, masculine, nominative, subject).

Number Gender Case Use

a. argumentls (1)

b. urbe (2)

c. medica (4)

d. manu (4)

e. metu (5)

f quo(5)

g. Graecia (8)

h. quibus (9)

i. versus (10)

j. genua (11)

Name: Section: Date:

156 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 20

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into English or Latin.

1. senatuT 2. of the senate

3. versu _ 4. for the feeling

5. metuum 6. the enjoyment (subj.)

7. manus (subj.) 8. of the verses

9. frtictum 10. with the horns

11. genibus (abl.) 12. of the dread

13. sensus (dir. obj.) 14. with the hands

15. spTritui 16. the knees (subj.)

17. comua 18. with spirit

B. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . Deinde in Graecia (metus) servitutis superavimus.

2. At neque (fructus; pi.) pacis neque

(metus; sg.) belli caruistT.

3. Hae (manus) mlserorum (servitus; sg.)

iTberatae erant.

4. ludicium ab itidice claro contra (senatus) iam pro-

nuntiatum est.

C. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1 . metus certus

Transformation:

Translation:

r^iJLM.
 .

Fourth Declension; Ablatives of Place from Which and Separation 157

spTrituum mortalium

Transformation:

Translation:

cornibus sinistrTs (abl.)

Transformation:

Translation:

Versus lectT erant.

Transformation: _
Translation:

Sensus mixtus est.

Transformation: _
Translation:

Hoc fructu delector.

Transformation:

Translation:

D. Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (e.g., puella fortQna > fortuna puellae, the
girl's fortune).

Transformation Translation

1. coniurati metus

2. beneficium senatus

3. auctor versus

4. ludus fructus

Translate into Latin, using standard word order and including macrons.

1 The fear of serious crime has terrified our family.

2. Thousands of verses had been written by that illustrious author.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

158 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 20

3. Those conspirators seem to lack the common friendship of the

people.

4. Why can the citizens not defend themselves from the enemy?

vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Which noun does not have a related meaning?

a. genu b. manus c. os d. scientia

2. Which noun is synonymous with metus?

a. argumentum b. probitas c. timor d. Veritas

3. Which verb is an antonym of prohibeo?

a. admitto b. discedo c. moveo d. paro

4. Identify the third declension -io noun derived from the fourth
principal part of prohibeo, and then give its direct English deriva-
tive and meaning.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 . A "cornucopia" is literally a of.

2. "Fructose" is sugar obtained from

3. To "genuflect" is to bend one's

4. Literally, a "manuscript" is by ., and

to "manufacture" is to by

5. In origin a "senate" was a council of.

 Fourth Declension; Ablatives of Place from Which and Separation 159

6. To "conspire" is literally to , a
"respirator" helps a person to , and
when the Muses "inspired" an artist they literally

him or her.

7. A proofreader's "caret" indicates that a sentence

something.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . De quibus montibus illud flumen celere fluit?

2. Nisi eos sceleribus istius tyrannl ITberabimus, metu gravT semper

superabuntur.

3. Odl servitutem, quae homines a fructibus dulcibus iTbertatis pro-

hibet.

4. FTlil eorum hos versus in ludo eras pronuntiabunt.

5. Cur senatus cTves nostros a metu illorum coniuratorum her! non

defensit?

6. Senex miser in genu dextrum cecidit et mortem celerem exspec-

tabat.

Name: Section: Date:

160 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 20

B. Answer these questions on "Cicero Urges Catiline's Departure.'

1. Quern Cicero in h5c loco appellat? (Responde uno verbo

Latind.)

2. Quid R5ma contra coniuratds e5 tempore habuit?

a. senatus consultum b. vires c. consilium d. haec omnia

3. Nisi Catilina discedet, quis metu non liberabitur? (Responde uno

verbo.)

4. A quo Catilina diu desTderatus est? (Responde in tota sententia.)

5. Contra quam cTvitatem Catilina et coniurati bellum gerent? (Uno

verbo responde.)

SPQR, Senatus Populusque Romanus: The Senate and the People of Rome
Motto of the Roman empire

\''»>:^a[
21
Third and Fourth
Conjugations: Passive Voice
of the Present System

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Recognize, form, and translate the passive voice of third and fourth con-
jugation verbs in the present system.
2. Recognize, form, and translate the present passive infinitive of third
and fourth conjugation verbs.

3. Provide a "synopsis" of a verb in the indicative mood.

Salvete iterum, discipulae atque discipuIT! Before attempting these exercises,

be sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter 21 of Wheelock's Latin and
memorized both the verb paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating
the words aloud. Valete iterum!

GRAMMATICA
1 . The pattern of substituting passive endings for active endings in the
present system works essentially the same for third and fourth conju-
gation verbs as for first and second. T/F

Name: Section: Date:

162 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 21

The principal irregularity in forming third and fourth conjugation

present system passives is in the person singular,
tense, for verbs of the conjugation.

Conjugate tango, tangere, in the present, future, and imperfect pas-

sive indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Imperfect
Singular Plural

4. Translate the above conjugation of tang5, tangere, in the present,

future, and imperfect passive indicative.

Present Future
Singular Plural Singular Plural

Imperfect
Singular Plural

1
Conjugate the indicated verbs in the present, future, and imperfect
passive indicative.

Present, relinquere Future, scire

Singular Plural Singular Plural

^!^?5!3S"
 Third and Fourth Cortjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System 163

Imperfect, defendere
Singular Plural

6. Identify, in order, the three present system passive third and fourth
conjugation verbs in Practice and Review sentences 1-8, give their
active equivalents, and translate both the active and passive forms.

Passive English Acrive English

a.

c.

Transform the following active sentence to passive without altering

the sense of the action, and then translate both active and passive
versions.

Active Passive

Latin: VTcTnl casam relinquent.

English:

Provide the active or passive equivalents of the following infinitives

and translate both.

Active English Passive English

a. rapere

b tangl

c. relinquere

d sciri

e. contmere

f delectarl

g. defendere

h iuberT

1. sentTre

J pronuntiarT

Name: Section: Dale:

764 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 21

9. Provide a synopsis of mitto, mittere, mlsi, missum, in the second

person singular.

Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

Active

Passive

10. Translate the above synopsis of mittd, mittere, inlsT, missum, in the
second person singular.

Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

Active

Passive

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into Latin or English.

1 . Casae rapientur.

2. Causae sciebantur.

3. Ex fenestra iacitur.

4. Naves relinquebantur.

5. Gens defendetur.

6. You yourself are being sent.

7. Troy was being defended.

8. Safety is abandoned.

9. The end will be perceived.

10. We ourselves are touched.

^/'yi^J^.
 .

Third and Fourth Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System 165

B. Transform the following active sentences to passive without altering

the sense of the action, and then translate.

1 HIT nautae asperT naves rapient.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Cur mater tua te in casa relinquit?

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Senatus Romanus scelera gravia eius sciebat.

Transformation:

Translation:

C. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 Multae gentes in finibus Graeciae (continere; impf ).

2. At ill! versus laudis causa (scrTbere; fut.).

3. Propter beneficia a familia, vTcInls, atque gente omnI iam bene

(scire; 2nd pers. sg. pres.).

4. Vulgus pecuniae causa fructti ludorum

(prohibere; fut.).

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . This band of conspirators will be ordered to depart for the sake

of the people.

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

/ 66 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 21

2. The territory was being seized because of that judge's arguments.

3. We were again writing a letter about our fears and other feeUngs.

4. Slavery ought to be prohibited throughout the entire world.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1. Fama: "fame":: causa:

2. Probus (honest) > probitas > "probity"; vTcuius >

>
3. Which noun does not have a related meaning?
a. cornu b. famiha c. gens d. populus

4. Which verb is close in meaning to scio?

a. careo b. intellego c. odT d. scribo

5. Which adjective has a meaning in common with asper?

a. acerbus b. certus c. communis d. sinister

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1 To "defenestrate" someone is literally to throw him or her

from a (ouch!).

2. One who is "omniscient" things, and

one who is "prescient" things they
happen.

3. If our interest in a topic is only "tangential," we will just

upon it briefly, and something "intact" has
been

4. A "relic" has been from an earlier age.

5. A "raptorial" bird violently its prey.

^^^!S^^
 Third and Fourth Conjugations: Passive Voice of the Present System 167

LECTIONES
A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. Animus eius pecunia aut cupiditate fructus tang! non poterat.

2. Amor patriae in omnT spTritu sentiebatur.

3. Sapientia et Veritas certa in hominibus stultTs non invenientur.

4. Virtus etiam multa pecunia non paratur.

5. SpTritus auctoris qui haec carmina scrTpsit a dels deabusque

immortalibus saepe tangebatur.

6. Ubi poenls asperls iudicio regis iTberatus est, in genu dextrum

cecidit et el iterum gratias egit.

7. Quis ex montibus Graeciae in fines Troiae contra hostes asperos

mittetur?

8. Salutis communis causa naves illTus gentis rapT iusserunt.

9. Fuerunt paucae fenestrae in casis vulgl RomanT. quod eo tem-

pore elves miser! pecunia caruerunt.

10. Nisi cum cura atque virtute laborabis, nihil fructus a te in h5c
mundo post mortem relinquetur.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

168 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 21

B. Answer these questions on "Virgil's Messianic Eclogue."

1 Qui poeta hunc locum scrTpsit?

2. Quando aetas nova, de qua auctor dicit, veniet?

a. nunc b. numquam c. olim d. nuper

3. A quo mundus aetate nova regetur?

a. puero b. patre puerl c. Achille d. matre puen

4. Quis ad Troiam mittetur?

a. puer b. pater puerT c. Achilles d. ahus Achilles

5. Quando erunt nulla bella atque nullae curae?

a. ubi puer de caelo mittetur b. ubi puer matrem sciet

c. ubi puer erit vir d. ubi pauca mala remanebunt

Carmina morte carent: Poetry never dies

Ovid

T
 .

22
Fifth Declension; Ablative
of Place Where; Summary
of Ablative Uses

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lessonyou should be able to
1. Recognize, form, and translate fifth declension nouns.
2. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative of place where" con-
struction.
3. Distinguish among the several uses of the ablative case introduced
thus far.

Iterum salvete, amlcae ac amicT! Before beginning these exercises, be sure

you have thoroughly studied Chapter 22 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them aloud. Tenete
fidem et semper eritis felices!

GRAMMATICA
1 The vowel characterizes all the endings of fifth declension nouns.

2. Fifth declension nouns are gender, except

and its compounds, which are

Name: Section: Date:

170 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 22

3. The -e- of the fifth declension genitive singular ending is long when
preceded by a and short when preceded by a

4. Identify the base and gender of spes incerta, the uncertain hope, de-
cline it fully, and provide the English meanings appropriate to each
case.

base: gender:

Singular
Latin English

Nom. spes incerta the uncertain hope

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Identify the base and gender of fides communis, the common trust,

and decline it fully.

base: gender:

Singular Plural

Nom. fides communis

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

E^^*^
 . .

Fifth Declension; Ablative of Place Where; Summary of Ablative Uses 171

6. Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. diem (lucky)

b. sperum (equal)

c. rel (Latin)

d. fide (alone)

7. The "place where" construction commonly requires the preposition

or , followed by a noun (or pronoun) in

the case.

8. If the noun in an ablative of manner construction is modified by an

adjective, the preposition cum may simply be or it may
be placed the adjective.

9. Which ablative case use always requires a preposition?

a. means b. manner c. accompaniment d. all these

10. With which ablative case use is a preposition not optional?

a. manner b. separation c. place where d. all these

1 1 Which ablative case use does not require a preposition?

a. with cardinal numerals b. time c. agent d. place from which

12. Identify the number, gender, case, and grammatical use of these
nouns in the chapter's Practice and Review sentences.

Number Gender Case Use

a. rebus (6)

b. spe (7)

c. parte (8)

d. spes (9)

e. fide (9)

13. Identify the number, gender, case, and grammatical use of these
nouns in the chapter's Sententiae AntTquae.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

172 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 22

Number Gender Case Use

a. re publica (4)

b. die (7)

c. fide (8)

d. fide (9)

e. manu (9)

EXERCITATIONES

Translate the following into Latin or English.

1 . ferro acrl (abl.)

tribus diebus

modi incerti (pi.)

aequo cum ammo

e montibus medils

in the middle of the house

of the powerful fires

8. for the Roman republic (dat.)

9. five of those days

10. with the Latin ships

B. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new sentence or phrase.

1 Me ex igne eripuit.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Spes nostras cernunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

H»?kVvr?T-v *y..
 .

Fifth Declension; Ablative of Place Where; Summary of Ablative Uses 173

3. ultra aequum modum

Transformation:

Translation:

4. in rebus incertls

Transformation:

Translation:

5. post diem fellcem

Transformation:

Translation:

6, sub fenestris medils

Transformation:

Translation:

Transform one of the nominative nouns to genitive to create a meaning-

ful phrase, and then translate (e.g., puella fortiina > fortuna puellae, the
girl's fortune).

Transformation Translation

1 dies finis

2. metus ferrum

3. senatus fides

4. res publica salus

5. spes coniurati

D. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . (fides) gentium quondam erat fortis.

2. (spes) pacis in mundo numquam tolletur.

3. Ignis spTritus human! (fides) alitur.

Name: Section: Dale:

 .
. :

174 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 22

4. MultT elves (res publica; gen.) e mani-

bus coniuratorum eripiuntur.

5. Numerus (dies) nostrorum incertus est.

E. Translate into Latin, using standard word order and including macrons.

1 Many were rescued from slavery on that day.

2. They departed from the middle of the city with great hope.

3. He ordered them to defend the republic from danger.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary hst.

1 Which noun does not have a related meaning?

a. annus b. causa c. dies d. hora

2. Which adverb has a meaning synonymous with quondam?

a. iam b. iterum c. olim d. protinus

3 Complete the analogy dexter : sinister : felix

:

a. asper b. communis c. fortunatus d. miser

4. Complete the analogy amd:5dT::tollo:

a. rapio b. rehnquo c. scio d. tango

5. Which verb does not belong?

a. dlcit b. inquit c. prohibet d. pronuntiat

B. Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

^?^n
 Fifth Declension; Ablative of Place Where; Summary of Ablative Uses 175

1. A "bona fide" contract is made in

and you might name your pup "Fido" because he is so

2. A criminal's "m.o." or "modus operandi" is his of

operating.

3. To approach a task with "equanimity" is to do so with a

4. An "immoderate" person does keep within normal

5. The "Mediterranean" was so named because of its location in the

of many

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Rem publicam magna cum spe gessit.

2. Eo die vTcTnl eius cum cura laboraverunt atque multas res para-
verunt.

3. PaucTs diebus Cicero rem publicam e perlculo eripiet.

4. Ubi in genua ceciderat, amicus eum sustulit.

5. Manum dextram ex igne protinus eripuit, sed tamen omnT sensu

caruit.

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

176 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 22

6. Vulgus beneficia aut fructum in versibus illTus auctoris non cemit.

7. "Se defendit animal coraibus," pater eius inquit, "ferro vir,'

8. Multa in mundo continentur ex quibus homines fructum trahere

possunt.

B. Answer these questions on "The Young Interns" and "Ambition and

Literature."

1 Quid est Symmachus?

a. discipulus b. medicus c. poeta d. amicus poetae

2. Quocum discipull venerunt?

a. poeta b. Symmacho c. manibus gelatls d. aquilone

3. Quid virl clarl ex poetls parare possunt?

a. litteras b. famam c. versus d. gentes

4. Quo omnes trahuntur?

a. cupiditate laudis b. htteris GraecTs
c. versibus Latlnls d. pecunia

5. Ubi Htterae Romanae leguntur?

a. in Graecia b. in fere omnibus terrls
c. in Italia d. in his omnibus locTs

Carpe diem: Seize the day

Horace

r^m
 .

23
Participles

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Define and explain the basic fiinctions of a "participle."
2. Recognize, form, and translate the four participles of regular Latin
verbs.

Salve, amice aut arnica! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you have
thoroughly studied Chapter 23 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized both the
paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them aloud. Carpe diem!

GRAMMATICA
1 A participle is a verbal
a. adjective b. adverb c. noun d. pronoun

2. Regular transitive verbs have participles.

a. one b. two c. three d. four

3. Of the three participle tenses, which has both active and passive forms?
a. present b. perfect c. future d. none of these

4. Which participle has only active forms?

a. present b. perfect c. future d. none of these

Name: Section: Date:

178 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 23

Which participle has only passive forms?

a. present b. perfect c. future d. none of these

The active and passive participles are

formed on the present stem (from the principal part).

The active and passive participles are

formed on the participial stem (from the principal
part).

Present participles are easily recognized because their stem ends with
the two letters and future active participle forms are
easily recognized because their stem ends with the two letters

Forms of the future passive participle, or "gerundive," are easily rec-

ognized by their stem ending in the two letters , and the
perfect passive participle is easily recognized as the prin-
cipal part of most regular transitive verbs.

10. In present participle forms, the stem vowel of all verbs is long before
-ns in the nominative (and neuter accusative) and be-
fore in all other forms.

11. In all -io verbs the letters appear before ns/nt in the
present participle.

12. Provide the missing participles.

Active Passive

Present educans, educantis

Perfect

Future

Present

Perfect contentus, -a, -um

Future

Present

Perfect

Future versurus, -a, -um

Present

Perfect

Future eripiendus, -a, -um

 .

Participles 179

Present

Perfect scTtus, -a, -um

Future

13. Translate the participles of the first two verbs in the preceding
question (to educate and to contain).

Active Passive

Present

Perfect

Future

Present

Perfect

Future

14. Which participle is not declined like magnus, -a, -um?

a. present active b. perfect passive
c. future active d. future passive

15. Present participles are declined as i-stems, except that the ablative
singular sometimes ends with the letter when the participle has a
verbal or substantive function rather than serving purely as an

16. The stem of the active participle can only be found

from the singular ending, but stems for the three other
participles can be found by dropping -us/-a/-uni from the nominative.

17. Decline the present participle of rapio, neuter only.

Singular Plural

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

18. As adjectives, participles must agree with the nouns or pronouns they
modify in

a. number b. gender c. case d. all these

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

180 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 23

19. As verbs, participles may

a. be modified by adverbs b. take direct objects
c. take indirect objects d. all these

20. The time of the artion de<;rnhed bv a narticinle is to

the tense of the

21. Match.

Participle Time of Action

present a. prior to main verb

perfect b. same as main verb

future c. subsequent to main verb

22. Translate only the participial phrase, first as a phrase, then as a

clause (e.g., Mater, filium amans, eum lauda^it, loving her son, since
she loved her son).

a. Vir, amlcum in fenestra videns, gaudet.

Phrase:

Clause:

b. Dux magnanimus. mTlites Latinos videns, eos protinus laudavit.

Phrase:

Clause:

c. MTlites, a duce magnanimo laudatl, quondam fuerunt felTces.

Phrase:

Clause:

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following into Enghsh or Latin in accordance with their

tense and voice.

1 pressurus

2. gaudens

3. iussurl

4. laboraturos

V.v.:\}«
 .

Participles 181

5. opprimendus

6. ostenta

7. petendum

8. relinquendl

9. tactus

10. scientes

1 1 having been turned

12. about to raise

13. writing

14. (fit) to be seen

15. (about) to be given

16. (deserving) to be sent

17. suppressing

18. having been pressed

19. going to exhibit

20. about to seek

B. Supply the correct form of the v^ords in parentheses and translate.

1 . Oratores, a duce aspero (opprimere; perf participle),

dlcere non poterant.

2. Signum ducis (videre; pres. participle), mllites ad

iTtus Tnsulae navigaverunt.

3. Sacerdos dona (desTderare; perf participle) e media

arce eripil.

Name: Section: Date:

m
182 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 23

4. Equi, per agros (currere; fut. act. participle), proti-

nus terrebantur.

C. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1 . miles, ad Tnsulam veniens

Transformation:

Translation:

arces, a vulgls oppressae

Transformation:

Translation:

causae aequae ostentae

Transformation:

Translation:

4. pater, filium educaturus

Transformation:

Translation:

casae relinquendae

Transformation:

Translation:

hastam a mllite iactam

Transformation:

Translation:

7. naves iTtora petentes

Transformation:

Translation:

vTcTna ex igne erepta

Transformation:

Translation:
 Participles 183

9. sacerdotT gaudentT

Transformation:

Translation:

10. orator fidem petens

Transformation:

Translation:

D. First translate the sentence, then transform the subordinate clause to a

participial phrase with equivalent meaning and translate the participial
phrase literally (e.g., Ubi pater flliam vidit, eam laudavit, When the fa-
ther saw his daughter, he praised her > Pater, flliam videns, eam laudavit,
seeing his daughter.

1. Quando ab Insula venerunt, GraecT gaudebant.

Sentence translation:

Transformation:

Phrase translation:

Quod Troiam amant, ex igne ferroque eam defendunt.

Sentence translation:

Transformation:

Phrase translation:

Quoniam a servitute aspera eo die llberatl sunt, homines sunt

felTces.

Sentence translation:

Transformation:

Phrase translation:

Duae ffliae iterum gaudent, quod matrem eras videbunt.

Sentence translation:

Transformation:

Phrase translation:

Name: Section: Dale

184 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 23

E. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . They were glad about the gifts exhibited.

2. Shall we ever be happy, desiring only fortune and fame?

3. They were uncertain about the men to be saved.

4. The horse, about to come into the city, had been made by the
Greeks.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary Ust.

1. Disc5:discipiilus::duc5:

NuUus : ullus : : numquam :

Which verb is nearly synonymous with ostendo?

a. cern5 b. demonstro c. teneo d. tollo

Identify the third declension -io noun derived from the fourth
principal part of each of the following verbs, and then give their
direct English derivatives and their meanings.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. peto

b. opprimo

c. deprimo

d. reverto

-5?^
 Participles 185

B. Complete each statement with an EngHsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 . To "avert" a risk is literally to

2. Living in "isolation" is like being on an

3. A "hastate" leaf is shaped like the tip of a

4. A "Uttoral" region is near the

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Ab hostibus captus, de gente sua nihil dixit.

2. Aliquem dona semper petentem non dUigo.

3. Ad ludum tuum filium meum docendum mlsT.

4. His TnsidiTs territl, vTtam miseram sine spe vTvemus.

5. Fidem habentibus nihil est incertum.

6. Sunt modi certT ac fines in rebus, ultra quos numquam possumus

esse felTces.

7. Aliquis diem capiens bene vivet.

Name: Section: Date:

186 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 23

8. S5la dulcia in mundo petentes, fide atque probitate caruimus.

9. "Res publica," inquit orator magnanimus, "semper est conser-

vanda."

10. Quidquid est in isto equo, timeo Graecos dona gerentes.

B. Answer these questions on "Laocoon Speaks Out."

1 . Quam diu GraecT contra Troianos bellum gerebant? (Responde in

Latina.)

2. Quos Minerva iuvit? (Responde in tota sententia.)

3. Qui mHites sunt in equo ligneo? (In tota sententia.)

4. Quis scTvit equum esse Tnsidias?

5. Quid Laocodn in uterum equT iecit?

6. Ad finem huius loci quid aut quis tremit?

a. Laocoon b. equus c. liasta sacerd5tis d. manus sacerdotis

Quidquid bene dictum est ab ull5, meum est:

Whatever has been said well by anyone is mine

Seneca the Younger

4,}:.,M. 1.
24
Abia tive A bsolu te;
Passive Periphrastic;
Dative of Agent

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative absolute" construction.
2. Define, recognize, and translate the "passive periphrastic" con-
struction.
3. Define, recognize, and translate the "dative of agent" construction.

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you

have thoroughly studied Chapter 24 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them aloud. By
the way, with participles and the passive periphrastic mastered, you now
understand that the Intellegenda (the gerundive of intellegere) leading off
each of these lessons are literally learning objectives that "have to be under-
stood." Latina omnibus intellegenda atque amanda est!

GRAMMATICA
1 . The ablative absolute is a type of participial phrase usually consisting
of a and a modifying in the

case.

Name: Section: Dale:

188 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 24

2. Only connected with the rest of the sentence, and usu-

ally set off by , the ablative absolute describes some gen-
eral under which the action of the sentence occurs.

3. Because the absolute phrase is completely self-contained, it never

modifies or refers directly to a or in the
rest of the sentence.

4. Two nouns or a noun and an in the ablative case can

also constitute an ablative absolute, with the
of the verb sum (which was lacking in classical Latin)
to be understood.

5. While the ablative absolute can be translated literally, it is usually

better style to transform the phrase to a clause by supplying a sub-
ordinating conjunction (usually , ,

or ), making the ablative the subject,

and converting the participle to a regular verb in the appropriate
relative to the main verb.

6. Translate each ablative absolute, literally first as a phrase, then as a

clause; Roma visa, mllites gaudebant,
e.g., ( With) Rome having been
seen and when Rome was (had been) seen.

a. Fabula narrata, servT rldebant.

Phrase:

Clause:

Imperatore imperium accipiente, mHites gaudebant.

Phrase:

Clause:

c. Oratore dicturo, multl elves in senatum veniunt.

Phrase:

Clause:

Identify and translate literally the four ablative absolute phrases in

Sententiae AntTquae 1-8.

Ablative Absolute Literal Translation

a.

c.

»».-<)n3K.
 Ablative Absolute; Passive Periphrastic; Dative of Agent 189

Passive periphrastic verbs consist of a

(also known as the ) plus a form of the
verb sum and indicate or action rather
than simple futurity.

9. Also sometimes employed to indicate obligatory action is the verb

a. cerno b. debeo c. ostendo d. peto

10. As in such perfect passive constructions as femina laudata est, the

participle in a passive periphrastic construction must
with the in , , and

11. To indicate the agent, i.e. the person performing the action, with a
passive periphrastic the Roman used
a. ablative with a/ab b. ablative withno preposition
c. dative with a/ab d. dative with no preposition

12. Because a literal translation of a passive periphrastic generally

sounds awkward, it is usually best to convert the clause into an
construction.

13. Translate each passive periphrastic and then as an active

first literally

clause (e.g.. Hie liber mihi legendus est, This book has to be read by
me > I have to read this book.)

a. Perfugium servo quaerendum est.

Passive:

Active:

b. Dux militibus expellendus erit.

Passive:

Active:

Carthago Romae delenda erat.

Passive:

Active:

14. Identify and translate literally the two passive periphrastics in

Practice and Review sentences 1-8.

Passive Periphrastic Literal Translation

a.

Name: Section: Date:

190 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 24

15. List in order, with the sentence number, and translate literally the two
datives of agent in Sententiae Antiquae 1-8.

Sent. No. Dative of Agent Translation

EXERCITATIONES

A. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. (servus; capere, perf pass, participle), duces arcem

eo die receperunt.

2. Imperium duel magnanimo (quaerere; participle

expressing necessity) est.

3. Homines mall sacerdotT e media arce (expellere;

participle expressing necessity) erunt.

(spes; opprimere, perf pass, participle),

quisque protinus fugit.

B. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate

the new phrase.

1 . equo verso

Transformation:

Translation:

2. ferris sublatls

Transformation:

Translation:

TT^W.
 Ablative Absolute; Passive Periphrastic; Dative of Agent 191

3. Fabulae narrandae erant.

Transformation:

Translation:

4. fidebus ostentls

Transformation:

Translation:

5. Hasta tibi excipienda est.

Transformation:

Translation:

6. rebus publicTs ereptls

Transformation:

Translation:

7. Modi virls petendl sunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

8. Insula videnda erit.

Transformation:

Translation:

9. iTtoribus inventls

Transformation: _

Translation:

10. Spes pellenda est.

Transformation: _
Translation:

C. First translate the sentence, then transform the subordinate clause to

an ablative absolute with equivalent meaning and translate the ablative
absolute literally: e.g., Ubi pater filiam vTdit, familia gaudebat. When
(he father saw his daughter, the family rejoieed > FTlia a patre visa,

( With ) the daughter (having been) seen by her father.

Section: Date:
192 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 24

1. Ubi equus vTsus erat, omnis Troia gaudebat.

Sentence translation:

Transformation:

Abl. absolute translation:

2. Dum ill! mHites s5lacium accipiunt, urbs aliis defendenda est.

Sentence translation:

Transformation:

Abl. absolute translation:

D. Translate into Latin; employ participles, ablative absolutes, and passive

periphrastics wherever possible.

1 . When these gifts had been received, the general thanked his sol-
diers.

2. After the leader had been banished, the senate had to give com-
mand to a new general.

3. With the state seeking peace, we should drive out that tyrant.

4. Whatever frightens you now, afterwards you should fear nothing.

VIS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary hst.

1. Fabula > fabulosus, -a, -um > "fabulous" :: imperium >

>

•.•.<>'2l.- M
 Ablative Absolute; Passive Periphrastic; Dative of Agent 193

Identify the third declension -ionoun derived from the fourth

principal part of each of the following verbs, and then give their
direct English derivatives and their meanings.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. excipio

b. recipio

c. repello

d. expello

e. derldeo

Which adverb can not be an antonym of postea?

a. ante b. eras c. olim d. quondam
Which verb is the most direct antonym of expello?
a. accipio b. inquit c. premo d. reverto

Give the third declension -or and -io nouns derived from the
fourth principal part of narro, their hteral meanings, and their
direct English derivatives.

Meaning Derivative

a. -or:

b. -io:

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A "laudatory" speech is full
of praise ").

1. An "imperious" person is always giving and his fa-

vorite verb forms are called

2. Achilles was "invulnerable" because he

be — except in his heel!

3. Ifyou "despise" others, you hterally "look down" on them; when

you "deride" others, you literally at

them.

Section: Date:
194 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 24

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . AequTs viris imperium tenentibus, ut omnes dicunt, res publica va-

lebit.

2. Omnes elves istum imperatorem timebant, qui expellendus erat.

3. Tyranno superat5, cTves atque servT libertatem et iura receperunt.

4. Gentibus Latlnls victis, Roma totam Italiam tenere cupTvit.

5. Servitus omnis generis hominibus iTberTs per totum mundum op-

primenda est.

6. Vulnere malo recepto, aUquis manum mllitis ex igne protinus ex-

cepit.

7. Erimusne umquam felTces, ultra fines Italiae vTventes?

8. Rebus incertls nunc intellectls, solacium perfugiumque accipere

possumus.
 .

Ablative Absolute; Passive Periphrastic; Dative of Agent 195

B. Answer these questions on 'De Cupiditate" and "The Satirist's Modus

Operandi."

1 Quid stuhus ante pecuniam desTderat?

a.omnia b. virtus c. probitas d. nihil

2. Cuius cupiditas nobis n5n fugienda est?

a. pecuniae b. gloriae c. ITbertatis d. imperiorum

3. Quis est "Iste" de quo Hercules dlcit?

a. Plutus b. Fortuna c. lucrum d. pecunia

4. Quo modo Horatius saturas scribet?

a. modo iucundo b. modo gravT
c. modo ficto d. his omnibus modls

5. De quo (aut quibus) auctor scribet?

a. veritate b. culpis c. vitils d. his omnibus

6. Essentially Horace is teUing us that while his subject matter

is his approach will be

7. Explain very briefly how Horace involves and even "threatens"

his audience in this last passage.

Pelle moras— magnl fortuna

brevis est favoris:

Banish delay — the fortune of high favor fleeting is

Silius Italicus

Same Section: Dale:

25
Infinitives; Indirect
Statement

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Define and explain the basic fiinctions of an "infinitive."

2. Recognize, form, and translate the six infinitives of regular Latin

verbs.

3. Define, recognize, and translate the "indirect statement" construction.

Salve, discipula aut discipule! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you
have thoroughly studied Chapter 25 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by repeating them aloud. Spero
te linguam LatTnam iam amare!

GRAMMATICA
1 . An infinitive is a verbal .; most transitive verbs have six,
i.e., both active and passive forms in the
and tenses, though the _
infinitive is rarely used.

2. A verb's present active infinitive is its principal part; the

present passive infinitive substitutes the letter for the ac-
tive infinitive's final -e, except in the conjugation
where is substituted for

..'.'difl..
 Infinitives; Indirect Statement 197

3. The perfect active infinitive is formed by adding the letters

to the active stem; the perfect passive infinitive consists

of the plus

4. The future active infinitive consists of the

plus the infinitive ; the rare future passive
infinitive consists of the in -um (identical to the neuter
nominative singular of the
plus

5. Provide the missing infinitives.

Active Passive

Present negare

Perfect

Future

Present teneri

Perfect

Future

Present

Perfect credidisse

Future

Translate the infinitives of the first two verbs in the preceding question
{to deny and to hold).

Active Passive

Present

Perfect

Future

Present

Perfect

Future

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

1 98 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 25

7. Match the infinitive usage.

Ducem discedere iussit. a. subject
Errare est humanum. b. object
Fabulam bene narrare potest. c. complementary

8. The subject of an infinitive is in the case.

9. An indirect statement follows a main verb of ,

activity, or perception, has its subject in

the case, and an instead of a finite verb.

10. The participles forming part of the perfect passive and future active
infinitives function rather like predicate adjectives with esse and thus
must agree with the infinitive's in
and ,

1 1 Which speech verb does not take an indirect statement?

a. ait b. inquit c. nego d. nuntio

12. Which verb does not take an indirect statement?

a. gaudeo b. nescio c. sentio d. suscipio

13. Like participles, the time of the action expressed by an infinitive is

relative to the tense of the main verb; match.

Infimtive Time of Action

present a. prior tomain verb

perfect b. same as main verb
future c. subsequent to main verb

14. One mode of expressing indirect statement is commoner in Latin, the

other in Enghsh; match.
We believe her to be brave a. Latin
We believe that she is brave b. English

15. In transforming the Latin indirect statement from an infinitive

phrase to a more idiomatic English subordinate clause, first supply
the conjunction , then translate the accusative subject
as if it were in the case, and then transform the
to a regular verb form in the appropriate

, relative to that of the main verb.

16. In Latin indirect statement the subject always expressed and is is

always in the case; when

pronoun is used, it will be a
a pronoun if the subject is the same as the subject of
the main verb and a pronoun when the subject is
diff"erent from that of the main verb.
 Infinitives; Indirect Statement 199

17. Match to indicate the correct infinitive of amo.

DTcit discipulum Latlnam (loves) a. amare
Dixit discipulos Latlnam (loved) b. amavisse
DTcit se Latlnam semper (loved) c. amaturum, -am esse
Dixit se Latlnam semper (would love)
DIcet discipulos Latlnam (will love)
Dixit eum Latlnam (had loved)

18. Amandum esse is an example of a

infinitive.

19. Translate into idiomatic English.

a. Scio servum hoc facere.

b. Scio oratores hoc fecisse.

c. ScTvI sacerdotem hoc fecisse.

d. ScTvistI eum hoc facere.

e. Scit se hoc facturam esse.

f ScTvit se hoc facturum esse.

g. Scio hoc mihi faciendum esse.

h. ScTvI hoc a te factum esse.

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from active to passive or passive to active and translate the

new form.
Transformation Translation

1. accipere

2. educatus esse

3. excepisse

4. expulsum Irl

5. oppressurus esse

6. reverti

7. recepta esse

Name: Section Date:

200 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 25

8. premere

9. putare

10. patefecisse

B. Translate from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late the new sentence.

1. Negat se hastam iecisse.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Nuntias te Tnsulam petere.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Puto earn risuram esse.

Transformation:

Translation:

Ostendit eum ibi iacere.

Transformation:

Translation:

Scrmus milites pulsos esse.

Transformation:

Translation:

C. Translate the sentence; then transform the first clause into an indirect
statement and translate the new sentence. E.g., Puella est discipula
bona; magister id scit. > The girl is a good student; the teacher hiows
it. > Magister scit puellam esse discipulam bonam. > The teacher knows
that the girl is a good student.

1 . Bellum cum virtute gesseras; imperator id credidit.

Translation:

Transformation:

Translation:

l-iiMR'...:.T« "n
 .

Infinitives; Indirect Statement 201

2. Linguam Latlnam semper amabis; id spero!

Translation:

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Feminae eum iuvabant; feminae mihi id dlxerunt.

Translation:

Transformation:

Translation:

D. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . Dehinc negavit adulescentem (esse; same time)

filium suum.

2. Non credo ducem imperium umquam (relinquere;

time after).

3. Imperator nuntiavit hostes a iTtore (avertere, pass.;

time before).

4. Servi postea dTcent se hlc ultra ftnes Italiae (capere,

pass.; time before).

E. Translate into Latin, using standard word order and including macrons.

1 The leader announced that he was sending the horses as gifts.

2. The loyal general denied that he would come into the city.

3. Many wise men believe that the human soul is immortal.

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

202 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 25

4. The wise and loyal priest warned that the horse had been made
by the Greeks.

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . FeEx > feGcitas > "felicity" : : ferox > >

: . fidelis > >
2. Dic5:nego::sci5:

3. Which adverb synonymous with dehinc?

is

a. deinde b. nunc c. ultra d. umquam

4. Ille:hic::ibi:

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 . A "credulous" person tends to everything he hears.

2. When one item is "subjacent" to another, it literally

it.

3. To "negate" a statement is to Its existence.

4. If a "peninsula" (from paene, almost, nearly, + msula) is "almost

an island," then the "penultimate" item in a series is

(i.e., next to) the

5. If you are "desperate," your have gone

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as Uterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.
 .

Infinitives; Indirect Statement 203

Quisquis credit se nulla vitia habere, is nimis errat.

2. Dux magnanimus negavit arcem Carthaginis delendam esse.

3. ServT speraverunt se perfugium atque solacium pro vulneribus ul-

tra montes inventuros esse.

4. GraecT duces geminT senserunt Troiam vTdisse diem ultimum.

5. Hostes feroces credunt omnem rem publicam sibi vincendam

esse.

6. Bene scio me multa nescTre; nemo enim, ut aiunt, potest omnia

scire.

B. Answer these questions on "The Death of Laocoon."

1 Aeneas, dux Tr5ianus, hanc fabulam in carmine Vergilil narrat; de

quo sacerdote dlcit?

2. Cuius del fuit ille sacerdos? (Responde in tota sententia.)

3. How is the phrase Unguis sibilis onomatopoetic?

4. Serpentibus vTsTs, qui elves fugiunt?

a. Aeneas et Troianl b. Laocoon et filil

c. puerT puellaeque d. hi omnes

5. Sacerdote et filiTs necatls. quid serpentes petunt?

a. Laocoon b. filil cius c. taurus d. arx Minervae

Name: . Section: Date:

204 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 25

6. Identify the simile in the second paragraph and explain briefly its
irony.

Homo sum — humani nil a me alienum put5:

I am a human being — / consider nothing human to be alien to me
Terence
26
Comparison of Adjectives;
Declension of Comparatives;
A hia tive of Comparison

INTELLECENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Explain what is meant by "comparison of adjectives."
2. Recognize, form, decline, and translate regular adjectives
in the com-

parative and superlative degrees.

3. Recognize and translate the uses of quant with comparative and super-
lative adjectives.

4. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative of comparison" con-

struction.

Be sure you have thoroughly stud-

Salvete, discipulae discipuFique carissimi!
ied Chapter 26 of Wheelock's Latin before attempting these exercises and —
remember to memorize the paradigms and vocabulary by repeating them
aloud. Latlna est lingua quam potentissima!

Name: Section: Date

 .

206 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 26

GRAMMATICA

1 A degree adjective indicates that a person or thing pos-

sesses a particular quaUty or characteristic.

2. A comparative degree adjective indicates that a person or thing pos-

sesses a greater degree of a characteristic than
a. another person or thing b. usual c. desirable d. all these

3. A degree adjective indicates that a person or thing has

the greatest degree of a characteristic in comparison either with
or more others or with what is or

Regular comparative degree adjectives are formed by adding

(m./f ) and (n.) to the of
the positive degree; the genitive singular ends in

5. Regular superlative degree adjectives are formed by adding

(m.), (f ), and (n.) to the

of the positive degree.

6. Comparative degree adjectives are i-stem adjectives of the third de-

clension. T/F

7. Superlatives follow the declension of magnus, -a, -um. T/F

8. Adjectives whose bases end with a vowel often form the comparative
and superlative degree with and , respec-
tively.

9. Match the possible translations.

brighter a. clarior, clarius

very bright b. clarissimus, -a, -um

rather bright
more bright
brightest
too bright
most bright

10. When quam a comparative it means ;

when it precedes a it indicates the greatest

degree of a characteristic.

Vl I
 Comparison of Adjectives; Declension of Comparatives; Ablative of Comparison 207

1 1 . When the first noun or pronoun in a comparison was either in the

or case, was frequently
omitted, and the second person or thing compared was in the
case, the so-called of

12. List the four comparatives and six superlatives in Practice and
Review 1-12.

Comparatives Superlatives

13. Identify the base and gender of lux clarior, the brighter light, decline
it fully, and provide the English meanings appropriate to each case.

base: gender:

Latin English
Singular

Nom. lux clarior the brighter light

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Plural

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Name: _ . Section: Date:

 .

208 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 26

14. Identify the base and gender of bellum brevius, the shorter war, and
decline it fully.

base: gender-

Singular Plural

Nom. bellum brevius

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

AM.
15. Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. cena (very brief)

b. fabularum (rather sad)

c. in foro (very full)

d. cum femina (more modest)

e. a tyranno (most arrogant)

f poetam (rather urbane)

g. animaha (more ferocious)

h, servl (very faithful)

EXERCITATIONES
A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and translate
the new phrase.

1 legum acerbiorum

Transformation:

Translation:

2. ab imperatore superbissimo

Transformation:

Translation:

•'-V 5
 Comparison of Adjectives; Declension of Comparatives; Ablative of Comparison 209

3. imperia ingentissima

Transformation:

Translation:

4. in linguTs iucundissimls

Transformation:

Translation:

noctem fortunatiorem

Transformation:

Translation:

perfugia salviora

Transformation: _

Translation:

7. solacils dulcissimls

Transformation:

Translation:

8. ex somnls longioribus

Transformation:

Translation:

9. vulnus gravius

Transformation:

Translation:

10. discipulam sapientissimam

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. Auctor postea scrlpsit versus (turpis; superlative).

2. Memoria noctis (felTx; superlative) diu remansit.

Name Section: Date:

 kJI

210 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 26

3. Cred5 earn esse (fidelis; comparative) quam eum.

4. Dux Carthaginis ad senatum litteras quam (brevis;

superlative) mittet.

C. Make the comparisons.

1. Quis est senior?

a. fllius b. pater

2. Quis est antlquissimus?

a. Achilles b. Cicero c. Caesar

3. Quid est brevissimum?

a. annus b. dies c. hora

4. Quod tempus est clarius?

a. dies b. nox

5. Quid est celerius?

a. equus b. homo
6. Quid est difficilius?

a. labor b. otium

7. Quid est trlstissimum?

a. morbus b. mors c. vulnus

8. Quis est potentissimus?

a. imperator b. miles c. servus

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. The wisest possible leaders should be invited (pass, periphrastic)

to this very serious dinner.

2. The teacher announced that the students would read a rather

short but very urbane book.
 Comparison of Adjectives; Declension of Comparatives; Ablative of Comparison 211

3. Nothing was sadder than that very faithful slave s death.

4. We hope that the memory of this rather disgraceful night will not
remain.

vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1. Many Latin adjectives form feminine third declension nouns by

adding -itudo, gen. -itudinis, to the adjective's base; these are ab-
stract nouns referring to the quality represented by the adjective.
E.g., fortis, forte, gives us fortitudo, fortitudinis, f , and the En-
glish derivative "fortitude," meaning bravery, courage. Identify the
nouns, their meanings, and their direct English derivatives that
are similarly derived from the following Latin adjectives.

Latin Noun Derivative Meaning

a. solus, -a, -um

b. turpis, turpe

2. Which noun is nearly synonymous with lex?

a. forum b. ius c. lux d. senatus

3. Which is not a possible meaning of quam in its various uses?

a. how b. than c. then d. which

4. Which has a meaning essentially opposite the others?

a. ante b. post c. prae d. pro

5. Complete the analogy sensus mens ITmen : : : :

a. animus b. caput c. casa d. oculus

6. Which verb has a meaning similar to invito?

a. iaceo b. patefacio c. suscipio d. voco

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

Name: Section: Date:

 .

212 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 26

1 A "subliminal" message is transmitted the usual

of perception.

2. "Translucent" material allows to pass from one side

to another, and to "elucidate" a subject is to shed
upon it.

3. On both the vernal and the autumnal "equinox," the length of the
is to that of the day.

4. A "somnambuhst" walks in his

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Nuntiaverunt ducem quam fortissimum venisse.

2. Luce clarissima ab omnibus visa, copiae fortissimae contra hostes

remissae sunt.

3. Isto homine turpissimo expulso, senatus tantum cTvibus fidehori-

bus dona dehinc dedit.

4. QuTdam negaverunt hunc auctorem esse clariorem illo.

5. Remedium horum vitiorum ultimorum videtur difficihus.

6. Ille dux putavit patriam esse sibi cariorem quam vitam.

 Comparison of Adjectives; Declension of Comparatives; Ablative of Comparison 213

7. NescTvit amlcum geminos fratres iucundissimos ad cenam ea

nocte invTtaturum esse.

8. Ut in limine ultimo stelerunt, fabulam trlstissimam narrabant et

multa de urbe nova quaerebant.

B. Answer these questions on "The Nations of Gaul" and "The Good

Life."

1 . Quis librum de bello Gallico scrlpsit?

2. Gallia a tribus gentibus incolitur, tantum his exceptls.

a. Belgae b. Aquitanl c. GallT d. Matronae

3. Quid Roman! Celtas appellant?

a. Gallia b. GallT c. differunt d. fortissiml

4. Quae gens tribus fluminibus ab alils dTviditur?

a. Belgae b. Aquitanl c. GallT d. nulla ex hTs

5. Belgae sunt fortiores quam

a. Aquitanl b. GallT c. hT duo d. nemo
6. Quid, ut Martialis putat, vTtam felTciorem non facit?

a. otium b. voluptas laboris

c. amTcitia d. pecunia a patre parata

7. Mors, ut poeta ait, non

a. beata est b. curis soluta est c. ndenda est d. timenda est

8. Which of Martial's points seems particularly alien to the work-

ethic of our democratic society?

Brevis ipsa vita est, sed mails fit longior:

Life itself is short, but it becomes longer with misfortunes

Publilius Syrus

Name: Section: Date:

27
Special and Irregular
Comparison of Adjectives

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize, form, and translate adjectives with irregular superlatives
and other adjectives with irregular comparisons.
2. Recognize, form, and translate the irregular adjectivetnoun plus.

Be sure you have thoroughly studied

Salvete, optimae discipulae discipuITque!
Chapter 27 of Wheelock's Latin before attempting these exercises and re- —
member to memorize the paradigms and vocabular>' by repeating them
aloud. Carpite diem, amIcT dTligentissiml!

GRAMMATICA

1. Six third declension adjectives ending in -lis form their superlatives

by adding rather than -issimus, -a, -um, to the base of

the positive; the six adjectives are: , ,

, , , and
 Special and Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 215

2. All adjectives with a nominative masculine ending in -er form their

superlatives by adding directly to this nominative mas-
culine -er form, not to the

3. Several Latin adjectives have comparatives and/or superlatives that

are irregularly formed and must be memorized. Which of the follow-
ing is not irregularly compared?
a. bonus b. diligens c. magnus d. malus

4. Which is regularly compared?

a. multus b. parvus c. pudlcus d. superus

5. Give the Latin comparatives and superlatives from which the follow-
ing English words are derived, and list the corresponding positive de-
gree of the Latin word.

Positive Comparative Superlative

pejorative pessimist

prior pnmary

superiority summit and

supremacy

minonty minimize

majority maximum

ameliorate optimist

6. In the singular plus functions as a neuter and is

regularly followed by a noun or pronoun in the case.

7. The plural of plus functions as an and has

a. consonant-stem forms b. i-stem forms c. both d. neither

Name: Section: Dale:

216 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 27

List the five irregular comparatives and three irregular superlatives in

Sententiae Antlquae 1-5.

Comparatives

Superlatives

Identify the base and gender of plures linguae, more languages, and
pliira fora, more marketplaces, and then decline fully.

base: base:

gender: gender:

Nom. plures linguae plura fora

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

10. Choose the correct form of the adjective and then translate the entire
phrase.

Adjective Translation

a. post cenam (very good)

b. legis (most difficult)

c. prae limine (very similar)

d. propter luces (smaller)

e. nocte (former)

f somnum (very easy)

g. solis (very beautiful)

h. contra nepotes (worst)

i. delectationum (greatest)

j. discipulas (keenest)
 .

Special and Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 217

k. cum dels (highest)

1. sub rosa (very slender)

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from comparative to superlative or from superlative to com-

parative and translate the new phrase.

1 servT humiliores

Transformation:

Translation:

2. animalis ferocioris

Transformation:

Translation:

3. nepotem dissimiliorem

Transformation:

Translation:

cum civibus fidelioribus

Transformation:

Translation:

5. geminos similiores

Transformation:

Translation:

6. consul! prTmo

Transformation:

Translation:

7. lingua utilior

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Date:

 .

Kjn

218 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 27

8. solis pulchrioris

Transformation:

Translation:

delectationem optimam

Transformation:

Translation:

10. noctes pessimae

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Make the comparisons.

1 Quis est dissimillimus aut dissimillima?

a. adulescens b. puer c. puella d. senex

2. Quid est humillimum?

a. ager b.caelum c. mons d. nubes

3. Quid est summum?

a. mons b. nubes c. sol d. terra

4. Quid est melius?

a. virtus b. vitium

5. Quid est peius?

a. bellum b. Tnsidiae

6. Quid habet plus aquae?

a. flumen b. mare

7. Quid habet plurimas delectationes atque voluptates?

a. lingua Latlna b. lingua Latlna
c. lingua Latlna d. lingua Latlna

8. Quid est minimum?

a. caput b. manus c. oculus d. os

C. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. Lux soUs (magnus; superlative) in caelo est.

 Special and Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 219

2. (celer; superlative) remedium, ut aiunt, non semper

est (bonus; superlative).

3. (sapiens; comparative) virT (parvus;

comparative) numerum vitiorum saepe habent.

4. Dehinc magistra nuntiavit se tantum discipulas

(dlligens; superlative) probatiiram esse.

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. Certain men hope that here they will receive only the best pos-
sible gifts.

2. They thought that their ancestors had more virtue than their de-
scendants.

3. How many students know that the Latin language is very easy?

4. Our ancestors believed that the sun was a god.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

KJ\

220 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 27

Vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Identify the third declension -tas nouns derived from the follow-
ing adjectives, and then give their direct Enghsh derivatives and
their meanings.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. humihs, -e

b. utilis, -e

Which noun is close in meaning to delectatio?

a. cena b. forum c. iTmen d. voluptas

Identify the third declension -io nouns derived from the fourth
principal part of the following verbs, and then give their direct
English derivatives and their meanings.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. pono

b. probo

4. Which adjective has a meaning essentially opposite that of

pnmus?
a. tristis b. turpis c. ultimus d. urbanus

5. Which verb has a meaning similar to exp5n6?

a. iaceo b. invito c. patefacio d. suscipio

Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 A work of art with great "verisimilitude" portrays things in a

manner to their character.

2. "Nepotism" is the practice of showing favoritism, especially in

business or pohtical appointments, to one's or
other relatives.

3. A "solarium" is a room or porch exposed to the

and used, for example, by recuperating patients.

4. A "proposition" is something for con-

sideration.
 Special and Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 221

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Delectationes facillimae saepe non sunt optimae.

2. Nepos minor sed dlligentior mains donum accepit.

3. PlOres virT credunt hoc bellum esse peius quam prlmum helium.

4. Quot maiora ac utilissima nepotes nostrl postea invenient?

5. Post tempestatem plurima flumina gracillima de montibus curre-

bant atque, nubibus expulsis, sol superus agr5s humiles aluit.

6. Caesar nescTvit has gentes esse inter se dissimillimas.

7. Quot consilia simillima ill! duces proposuerunt atque proba-

verunt?

B. Answer these questions on "Alley Cat,*" "Thanks a Lot," and "An

Uncle s Love."

L Amatne nunc Catullus Lesbiam? (Responde in tota sententia.)

2. In which verses does Catullus place key words at the end of the
hne for emphasis? Explain.

Name: Section: Date:

 iUI

222 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 27

3. Cui (in secundo carmine) Catullus gratias agit?

a. Romulus b. Cicero c. nepotes RomulT d. poeta pessimus

4. Comment on Catullus' use of superlatives in poem 49.

5. Qui frater in tertio loco dlcit?

a. frater quT in urbe vTxit b. frater qui vTtam in agrTs egit

6. Quot filios agricola habet? (In tota sententia.)

7. Quis est carissimus aut carissima fratrl urbano?

a. ipse b. filius suus c. filius fratris d. uxor pudTca

Omnia sol temperat: The sun tempers all things

Carmina Burana
 —

28
Subjunctive Mood; Present
Subjunctive; Jussive and
Purpose Clauses

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
/. Define the "subjunctive mood," distinguishing it from the indicative
and imperative.
2. Recognize, form, and translate the present subjunctive, active and pas-
sive, for verbs of all four conjugations.
3. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive 'jussive clause."
4. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "purpose clause'"'

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque dUigentissiml! Be sure you have thoroughly

studied Chapter 28 of Wheelock's Latin before attempting these exercises
and remember to memorize the paradigms and vocabulary by repeating
them aloud. Carpamus diem, atque LatTnam discamus ut maximos auctores
R5mae antlquae legamus!

GRAMMATICA
1 . "Mood" is the of expressing a verbal action or state of
being.

Same: Section: Dale:

 KUI

224 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 28

2. The imperative mood someone to undertake an action;

the indicative mood _ some action is or is not in fact
that
occurring, or that it did or did not, or will or will not, occur; the sub-
junctive mood, by contrast, often describes actions that are only
, , or

3. The subjunctive is used (more/less) frequently in Latin

than in Enghsh.

4. Of the six Latin verb tenses, the and

do not have subjunctive forms.

5. Subjunctive forms are differentiated from indicative forms in the pres-

ent tense chiefly through the change or addition of a

6. The sentence
is a helpful mnemonic device for remembering the that
immediately precede the personal endings in the present subjunctive
of the four conjugations.

7. Conjugate the indicated verbs in the present active subjunctive.

invTtare tacere
Singular Plural Singular Plural

2.

3.

cedere
Singular Plural

8. Conjugate the indicated verbs in the present passive subjunctive.

ponere eripere
Singular Plural Singular Plural

3
 Subjunctive Mood; Present Subjunctive; Jussive and Purpose Clauses 225

invenlre
Singular Plural

Translate invTtare in the present active subjunctive and invenlre in the

passive (as conjugated above), using "may" as the Enghsh auxiliary.

invTtare invenlre
Singular Plural Singular Plural

10. As the term "subjunctive" implies, subjunctive verbs were most

commonly employed in one of the commonestclauses;
exceptions, and the only one introduced by Wheelock, is the
subjunctive, which is used as the main verb in an
independent clause expressing a

11. Match.

Commonly used to express Mood

1st person command a. imperative
2nd person command b. subjunctive
3rd person command
12. In translating the jussive subjunctive, supply the auxiliary
, followed by the (in the objective case if

a pronoun, i.e.. not /, we, he, she, it, they, but

)•

3. A negative jussive clause is introduced by

14. A purpose clause is a clause indicating the

- . of the action in the clause.

15. Purpose clauses are introduced by the conjunction , if

positive, or if negative.

16. In a purpose clause, ut/ne may be translated as that, so that, or in

order that (not), with supplied as the auxiliary for the

Name: Section: Date:

 .

226 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 28

present subjunctive verb; sometimes, when the subject of the main

clauseand the purpose clause are the same, the conjunction can be
omitted in translation (or translated in order) and the verb translated
simply as an

17. List the five jussive subjunctives in Practice and Review sentences 1-11.

18. List the six subjunctives used in purpose clauses in Sententiae

Antlquae 1-12.

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform each sentence from singular to plural or plural to singular

and then translate the new sentence.

1 Parens flliam amet.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Ne servT cenTs egeant.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Probem legem utilem.

Transformation:

Translation:

Nepotes cursus currant.

Transformation:

Translation:

5. Ne de hoc taceam.

Transformation:

Translation:

Occasionem praestet.

Transformation:

Translation:
 .

Subjunctive Mood; Present Subjunctive; jussive and Purpose Clauses 227

B. Transform the second clause into a purpose clause with the verb in the

present subjunctive and then translate the new sentence; e.g.. Cum
cura laborat; Latlnam bene discet. > Cum cura labdrat ut Latlnam bene
discat. > He works with care in order to learn Latin well.

1 Librum maxima cum cura scrlbit; discipulT bene discent.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. QuTdam beneficia parentibus praestant; ipsT a filils suls dUigentur.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Prlnceps senattis leges acerbiores nuntiat; coniuratl non rema-

nebunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

C. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses and translate.

Ne istl turpissiml hostibus arma aut sdlacium

(praestare; subj.).

2. Mores maiorum (conservare; 1st pers. pi. subj.) ut

nosipsT maiorem occasionem pacis (habere).

3. Parentes islum superbissimum e limine casae

(expellere; subj.) ne familia trlstis Tnsidias (timere).

Name: Section: Dale.

 .

lUI

228 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 28

4. Maxima beneficia atque plurimas delectationes amlcitiae

(laudare; 1st pers. sg. subj.).

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . Let the emperor send us the best possible arms.

2. They come to offer us a better opportunity.

3. He is again writing similar words in order to help the people.

4. Let her read the letter so that she may not fear death.

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Complete the analogy sol : dies : : luna :

a.forum b. lux c. nox d. somnus

2. Quid est clarissimum?

a. luna b. sol c. Stella d. vesper

3. Identify three nouns in the new vocabulary that produce Enghsh

derivatives simply by dropping the genitive ending.

4. Which adjective is nearly synonymous with princeps?

a. dissimilis b. humihs c. primus d. urbanus

5. Which is not related to mortuus?

a. immortal b. moratorium c. mortuary d. post mortem

6. Which verb is synonymous with egeo?

a. careo b. cedo c. expleo d. probo
 Subjunctive Mood; Present Subjunctive; Jussive and Purpose Clauses 229

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. "Lunatics" are so-called because they were once thought to be

possessed by the power of the

2. A "taciturn" person is and reclusive.

3. To "recede" is to ; an "antecedent"
has ; to "proceed" is to
; to "intercede" is to ;

and one who is "deceased" has

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Tantum haec verba felTcia vobls dico ne discedatis.

2. Mortuorum causa haec diflficillima faciamus.

3. Arma paremus ne ITbertas nostra tollatur.

4. Melidra et maiora faciat ne vTtam miserrimam agat.

5. Deis summls et animls parentum nostrorum arma dedicemus ut

ofRcium praestemus.

6. Poeta puellae pudicae plurimas rosas graciles mittat.

7. Quot vltae amittendae sunt ut ITbertas conservetur?

Name: Section: Dale

 BUI

230 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 28

8. Credamus non solum virtutem esse meliorem quam vitium, sed

etiam earn prae omnibus rebus humanis habendam esse.

B. Answer these questions on "Remove My Name," "One Must Be

Friendly," and "The Days of the Week."

1. Cur poeta Pontiliano libros non mittit?

a. non libros habet, tantum hbellos

b. sperat Pontilianum librds su5s missurum esse

c. putat Pontilianum deinde el libellds daturum esse

d. omnia haec

2. How does Martial use rhyme effectively in Epigram 7.3?

3. How is Martial's positioning of the personal names Pyladen and

Oresten stylistically effective?

Quem diem RomanI ex sole appellaverunt?

a. primum b. secundum c. tertium d. quartum

Quid HebraeT eundem diem appellaverunt?

a. sabbatum b. unum diem sabbatl

c. diem Saturn! d. diem dominicum

Qui dies (in Anglica, i.e., in English) a Stella clarissima

appellabatur?
a. Friday b. Saturday c. Sunday d. Monday

Praestatur laus virtutT, sed inult5 ocius verno gelu tabescit: Praise is offered
for virtue, but it disappears much more quickly than a frost in spring
Livius Andronicus
29
Imperfect Subjunctive;
Present and Imperfect
Subjunctive of Sum and
Possum; Result Clauses

INTELLECENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

/. Recognize, form, and translate the imperfect subjunctive, active and
passive, for verbs of all four conjugations.
2. Recognize and translate the present and imperfect subjunctives of sum
and possum.
3. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "result claused

Carpamus diem, discipuU discipulaeque dignissimae! Be sure you have thor-

oughly studied Chapter 29 of Wlieelock's Latin before attempting these exer-
cises — and remember to memorize the paradigms and vocabulan.- by re-

peating them aloud. Discite LatTnam tanta cum cura ut in mentibus vestrls

semper remaneat!

Same: Section: Date:

 .

u
232 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 29

GRAMMATICA
1 The imperfect subjunctive for any verb is formed by adding the usual
present system endings directly to the
(i.e., the principal part) after lengthening
the final -e (except before nt and final -m, -r, and -t).

2. Conjugate the indicated verbs in the imperfect active subjunctive.

probare egere
Singular Plural Singular Plural

cedere
Singular Plural

3. Conjugate the indicated verbs in the imperfect passive subjunctive.

praestare explere
Singular Plural Singular Plural

moUIre
Singular Plural

Translate probare, to approve, in the imperfect active subjunctive and

molllre, to calm, in the passive (as conjugated above), using "might"
as the English auxihary.
 Imperfect Subjunctive; Present and Imperfect Subjunctive of Sum and Possum; Result Clauses 233

probare, active moIITre, passive

Singular Plural Singular Plural

5. The present subjunctive of sum adds the usual endings

to the stem (with the vowel shortened before -m, -nt,
and -t); for the present subjunctive of possum, simply add the prefix
to each of these forms.

6. The imperfect subjunctives of both sum and possum follow the

normal rule, i.e., present plus endings.

7. Conjugate sum in the present subjunctive, possum in the imperfect.

sum, present possum, imperfect

Singular Plural Singular Plural

8. The imperfect subjunctive is employed in a variety of clause types,

ordinarily when the main verb is a tense.

9. The exact translation of the imperfect subjunctive, like that of any

subjunctive tense, depends upon the type of in which it

is employed; in purpose clauses, the imperfect is commonly

translated with the auxiliary (\s. the present tense,
where the auxiliary is ).

10. A result clause is a clause indicating the

of the action in the clause.

11. Match.

Used to Express Clause Type

a command a. jussive
the consequences of an action b. purpose
the objective of an action c. result

Result clauses are regularly introduced by the conjunction

; if negative, the clause contains some

Name: ^ Section: Date:

 laai

234 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 29

word (vs. negative purpose clauses, which are introduced by

)•

13. Whether positive or negative, result clauses can usually be

distinguished from purpose clauses by sense and context and by the
fact that the main clause introducing a result clause usually contains
a word indicating degree, including the adverbs ,

, and meaning
, so, or the adjective
, meaning so much, so great.

14. In a result clause, ut is translated as

a. that b. so that c. in order that d. all these

15. In a result clause the subjunctive verb is ordinarily translated as an

, i.e., without an ; "may" or "might" are
used, however, when the result described is only rather
than actual.

16. List the six subjunctives in Practice and Review sentences 1-11, and
identify the clause type (jussive, purpose, or result) in which each
appears.

Subjunctive Clause Type

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late, using "may" as the auxihary for present subjunctives, "might"

for imperfects.

1 . fatum durum responderet

Transformation:

Translation:
 Imperfect Subjunctive; Present and Imperfect Subjunctive of Sum and Possum; Result Clauses 235

2. natae dlligentes taceant

Transformation:

Translation:

3. ingenium eius probetur

Transformation:

Translation:

soles surgerent

Transformation:

Translation:

parens osculo moUiatur

Transformation:

Translation:

urbes similes conderentur

Transformation:

Translation:

in cursibus contendant

Transformation:

Translation:

8. prTmo nepotl id dedicet

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Transform the second clause into a result clause with the verb in either
the present or imperfect subjunctive, depending on the tense of the
main verb, and then translate the new sentence: e.g.. Tanta cum cura
laborat; Latlnam bene discit. > Tanta cum cura labdrat ut Latlnam bene
discat. > He works with such great care that he is learning Latin well.

1 . Ilium librum utilissimum tanta cum cura scrlpsit; discipulT eius

bene discebant.

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Date:

236 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 29

2. Mentes discipulorum quidem sunt tarn acres; linguam Latlnam

bene discere possunt.

Transformarion:

Translation:

3. lUe prlnceps vero fuit ita fortis; nemo contra eum pugnare potuit.

Transformation:

Translation:

C. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses and translate.

1. Discipull tantos libros legerunt ut veritatem

(discere).

2. Auctor vero tam bene scrlpsit ut pluriml libros eius

(legere).

3. Adulescens tam durus erat ut nuUos amicos denique

(habere).

4. Tanta cum sapientia dixit ut ne oratores potentissiml quidem con-

tra verba eius (pugnare).

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . The constellations were so bright that everyone could see them.

2. He gave them better arms so that the walls might not be overcome.
 .

Imperfect Subjunctive; Present and Imperfect Subjunctive of Sum and Possum; Result Clauses 237

3. You have such a quick mind that you can learn very many things
without labor.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Gloria > gl5riosus, -a, -um > "glorious" : : ingenium >

> : : contentum > >

2. Which adjective has one or more meanings in common with durus?

a. acerbus b. dignus c. gracilis d. humilis

3. Which noun is synonymous with nata?

a. delectatio b. filia c. natura d. occasio

4. Which verb is an antonym of responded?

a. condo b. pono c. praesto d. quaero

5. Which is unrelated in meaning?

a. ita b. quot c. sic d. tam

6. Complete the analogy itioenia : urbs : : arma :

a. corpus b. miles c. maiores d. fatum

7. Which is a synonym of osculum?

a. amlca b. basium c. auris d. occasio

8. Which does not belong with sidus?

a. luna b. sol c. solacium d. stella

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., 'A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. To "dignify" a question is to consider it of a re-

sponse.

2. To "mollify" an adversary is to make him , and an

"emollient" medication makes the skin

Name: Section: Date:

238 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 29

3. A "pugnacious" bully always wants to

4. Latin's "resurgence" in the curriculum indicates that it is

in interest.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound EngUsh idiom.

1 . 111! adulescentes quidem erant tam dissimiles ut nemo putaret eos

esse fratres.

2. Luna atque sTdera supera vero sunt tam clara ut perlcula vesper!
aut noctis non timeamus.

3. Sic de maioribus mortuTs denique respondeamus ut memoria fac-

torum eorum resurgat et semper remaneat.

4. Catullus ex amica oscula tam multa quam sTdera noctis desT-

derabat.

5. Tam diu contenderunt atque tanta cum virtute pugnaverunt ut

urbis moenia. quae maiores dignissimi olim condiderant, num-
quam vincerentur.
 .

Imperfect Subjunctive; Present and Imperfect Subjunctive of Sum and Possum; Result Clauses 239

6. OptimI librl discipulTs legend! sunt ut veritatem et mores bonos

discant.

7. Omnes cives se patriae dedicent ne hostes ITbertatem tollant.

8. Ingenium Caesaris fuit tarn acre ut ne ab hostibus durissimls

quidem molllrl posset.

B. Answer these questions on "A Great Orator," "How Many Kisses," and
"You're All Just Wonderful."

1 Quando fuit Cicero tarn perturbatus?

a. ubi surrexit ut responderet b. ubi diu responderat
c. ut omnia timeret d. sT causam neglexerat

2. Cicero putavit audltores de eius dicturos esse.

a. ingenio b. virtute c. officio d. his omnibus

3. Of the two similes in Catullus 7, one contains a striking

personification; explain briefly.

4. Quod unum verbum nobis de mente CatullI dlcit*:

5. Cur Callistrato non omnes laudandT sunt?

a. quod tantum dignos laude b. quod malos solos semper
laudat laudat
c. ne laudes eius veritate egeant d. propter haec omnia

Tanta potentia formae est: So great is the power of beauty

Ovid

Name: Section: Date:

30
Perfect and Pluperfect
Subjunctive; Indirect
Questions; Sequence of
Tenses

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize, form, and translate the perfect afid pluperfect subjunctive,
active and passive, for verbs of all four conjugations.
2. Provide a complete synopsis of a verb, in both the indicative and sub-
junctive moods.
3. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "indirect question."
4. Define, recognize, and translate the "active periphrastic."
5. Explain "sequence of tenses" in sentences containing subjunctive
clauses.

Salve atque carpe diem, amice aut amica! Be sure you have thoroughly stud-
ied Chapter 30 of Wheelock's Latin before attempting these exercises — and
remember memorize the paradigms and vocabulary by repeating them
to
aloud. Disce Latlnam maxima cum cura et scies quantas delectationes haec
lingua tibi dare possit!
 .

Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive; Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses 241

GRAMMATICA
1 The perfect active subjunctive for any verb formed by adding
is

plus the personal endings to the stem

(identified from the principal part), with the vowel
shortened before -m, -t, and -nt; for the perfect passive,

substitute the subjunctive for sum in the indicative

form.

2. The pluperfect active subjunctive for any verb is formed by adding

plus the personal endings to the stem,
with the vowel shortened before -m, -t, and -nt; for the
pluperfect passive, substitute the subjunctive for eram
in the indicative form.

3. Conjugate cognosco, cognoscere, cognovT, cognitum, in the perfect sub-

junctive, active and passive.

Active Passive
Singular Plural Singular Plural

4. Translate the above forms of cognoscere, to recognize; use the

auxiliary "may have."

Active Passive
Singular Plural Singular Plural

5. Conjugate amo, amare, amavT, amatum, in the pluperfect subjunctive,

active and passive.

Active Passive
Singular Plural Singular Plural

7-

Name: .^prtinn Dntc

242 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 30

6. Translate the above forms of amare, to love; use the auxiliary "might
have."

Active Passive
Singular Plural Singular Plural

7. Provide a complete synopsis of dedicd, dedicare, dedicavT, dedicatum,

in the third person singular.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

Active

Passive

SUBJUNCTIVE
Active

Passive

Translate the above synopsis of dedicare, to dedicate; employ the

auxiliaries "may," "might," "may have," and "might have," as usual in

a conjugation or synopsis.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

Active

Passive

SUBJUNCTIVE
Active
 .

Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive; Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses 243

Passive

9. An indirect question is a clause, introduced by an

word, which reports some question , i.e.,

not via a direct quotation.

10. Like an indirect statement, an indirect question is usually preceded

by a verb of , , or
; but its own verb, instead of being an
is a finite verb in the mood.

1 1 An indirect question is easily distinguished from the other

subjunctive clauses learned thus far, both by sense and context and
by the fact that it is introduced by an word rather than
by ut or ne.

12. In an indirect question the subjunctive verb is usually translated as

an , i.e., without an

13. An active periphrastic consists of the

participle plus a form of the verb , and can be used to
indicate time in a subjunctive clause.

14. Identify the one active periphrastic appearing in the Lectiones below.

15. List the seven subjunctives in Practice and Review sentences 1-5. and
identify the clause type (jussive, purpose, result, or indirect question)
in which each appears.

Subjunctive Clause Type

16. The rule for sequence of tenses addresses the logical progression of
tenses from a clause to a clause.

Name: Section: Date:

244 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 30

17. In general, the primary tenses include the and

, whereas the historical tenses include all

tenses.

18. A primary tense main verb must be followed by a tense

verb in a subordinate clause; a secondary tense main verb must be
followed by a tense.

19. In a primary tense sequence, a present subjunctive indicates action

occurring at the time as the main verb or
that of the main verb, and a subjunctive indicates
action to the main verb.

20. In a secondary tense sequence, an subjunctive indicates

action occurring at the same time as the main verb or after that of
the main verb, and a subjunctive indicates action
to the main verb.

21. List the subjunctive verbs in the indirect questions in Sententiae

Antlquae 1-6, identify the sequence (primary or historical), and
indicate the time of the action in the subjunctive clause relative to
that of the main clause (before, same time, after).

Subjuncrive Sequence Relative Time

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late, using "may," "might," "may have," and "might have" as the auxil-

iaries for, respectively, the present, imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect

subjunctives (remember, however, that the actual auxiliaries, if any, em-

ployed in translating sentences into English depend upon the type of
clause in which the subjunctive is used).
 Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive; Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses 245

1 . quid prlnceps bibat

Transformation:

Translation:

2. quantos honores acceperint

Transformation:

Translation:

3. quantae mensae explerentur

Transformation:

Translation:

4. cur nata respondisset

Transformation:

Translation:

quando hi rldiculT rogent

Transformation:

Translation:

6. quae occasio cognita sit

Transformation:

Translation:

7. quare parens dubitaret

Transformation:

Translation:

8. a quo comprehensus esset

Transformation:

Translation:

9. quae fata exponantur

Transformation:

Translation:

10. utrum maneam an discedam

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Dale:

246 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 30

B. Transform the direct question into an indirect question with the verb
in the appropriate tense, depending on the tense of the main verb, and
translate the new sentence; e.g.. Vir rogat, "Quid fecistf?"' > Vir rogat
quid fecerls. > The man asks what you did

1. Magistra rogabat. "Quid discipull didicerunt?"

Transformation:

Translation:

2. CeterT quaerunt, "Quando numerus armorum minuetur?'

Transformation:

Translation:

3. "Quot oscula cupio?" Tibi dlcaml

Transformation:

Translation:

C. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses and translate.

1. PrTmo rogavit ubi tanta arma repente (invenire;

time before).

2. Mundus quidem quaerit unde malum (\enlre; same

time).

3. Pater meus denique exposuit ubi mater eo vespero furtim

(cedere: same time).

4. Mox praestent quantas divitias (consumere; 3rd pers., pi.,

time before).

D. Translate into Latin: employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . We learned so much that we arrested the two men.

2. We will soon learn whv the two men have been arrested.
 .

Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive; Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses 247

3. The harsh leader asked from what place (whence) the soldiers had
come.

4. You know why he is hesitating about that honor.

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary- list.

1 Which does not belong?

a. aqua b. cena c. luna d. mensa

2. RTdicuIus > > "ridiculous."

3. Which is not interrogative?

a. ita b. quantus c. unde d. utrum ... an

4. Identify the third declension -io nouns derived from the fourth
principal part of the following verbs, and then give their direct En-
glish derivatives and their meanings.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. cognosce

b. comprehends

c. consumo

d. expono

5. Which is closest in meaning to ceteri?

a. alius b. alter c. certus d. incertus

6. Complete the analogy mors : vita : : mortuus :

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g.. "A "laudatory" speech is full
of praise ").

1. A "furtive" glance is one taken

2. A "bibulous" fellow a lot.

Name: Section Date:

248 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 30

3. An "indubitable" fact can be

4. In music, a "diminuendo," like a decrescendo, is a gradual

in loudness or force.

5. A "prerogative" is the right to be oth-

ers what one wishes.

LECTIONES
A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound EngHsh idiom.

1 . Orator repente rogavit cur ceterl elves ingenium huius virT non
cognovissent.

2. Nescio utrum vTvT an mortuT plus honoris eras accepturl sint.

3. ScTsne quam dignus honoribus ille princeps fuerit?

4. Ille auctor narrabat nobis quanta cum cura Romulus moenia

urbis condidisset.

5. Postcum fratre pugnavit, Romulus sic contendit ut vero moenia

Romae potentissimae ad summa sTdera mox surgerent.

6. Audlvimus coniurat5s esse tam malos atque virtute sic egere ut,
comprehensi atque a consule rogatl, de totis InsidiTs primo tace-
rent.
 .

Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive; Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses 249

7. Orator audltores verbis mollTvit ne Ira vincerentur.

8. Scisne quam multae stellae sint in caelo? — tarn multa basia desi-

dero, mea arnica!

B. Answer these questions on "Evidence and Confession" and the three

selections from Martial.

1 Unde res publica erepta est?

a. fronte b. laboribus c. consilils d. igne

2. A quo erepta est?

a. laboribus b. consilils c. Cicerone d. his omnibus

3. Cuius signum in litteris inventum est?

a. Catillnae b. Ciceronis c. Lentull d. neminis

4. Quis de Insidils denique ac repente dixit?

5. Quot ridicull sunt in prlmo ac secund5 carminibus?

a. unus b. duo c. tres d. quattuor

6. Comment on the chiasmus in bonas p5nis, sed ponis opertas and

how it is effective.

7. Quando Maro dicit se Martiall dona daturum esse?

a. dum vivet b. post mortem poetae

c. post mortem suam d. numquam

8. Quid Martialis desiderat?
a. dona b. mortem Maronis c. ridere Maronem d. haec omnia

9. Ut Martialis putat, quis est dignus maiore honore?

a. Catullus b. Vergilius c. uter d. neuter

Nunc est bibendum: Now ne must drink

Horace

Name: Section: Date:

 .

31
Cum Clauses; Fero

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Define, recognize, distinguish among, and translate the four types of
"cum clauses."
2. Recognize, form, and translate the irregular verb fero.

you
Salvete, discipuG dignissimT! Before beginning these exercises, be sure
have thoroughly studied Chapter 31 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them aloud. Cum
multum laboretis, multa discetis!

GRAMMATICA
1 As a preposition, cum means and links a noun or pro-
noun with some other element in a sentence; as a cum
can be translated or , and
links two clauses.

2. Match.

Cum Clause Type Translation

__ adversative a. when (exact time)

causal b. when (general)
circumstantial c. since
temporal d. although
 Cum Clauses; Fero 251

3. Match.

Cum Clause Type Mood

adversative a. indicative
causal b. subjunctive
circumstantial
temporal

4. Cum clauses are easily distinguished from the other subjunctive

clauses already learned, since they are introduced by
the temporal clause is distinguished from the others, since its verb is

in the mood; the remaining three types are

distinguished by analyzing the relationship between the event
described in the cum clause and that described in the
clause; and the adversative clause is often further recognizable from
the fact that the adverb often occurs in the main
clause.

List the verbs in the three cum clauses in Practice and Review-
sentences 1-10, and then identify the specific clause type.

Verb Clause Type

6. As can be seen from the examples in Chapter 31. the verb in a cum
clause is regularly translated as an i.e., without any
subjunctive auxiUaries.

7. Fero, to hear, carry, is a slightly irregular verb of the

conjugation; although the third and fourth principal parts are
unusual, all the system tenses are nevertheless regularly
formed, and the only irregularities in the present system are a few
forms that drop the stem vowel in the tense (indicative.
imperative, and infinitive).

8. List the nine irregular present system forms of fero.

Present Indicative Present Imperative Present Infinitive

Active Passive Singular Plural .Active Passive

Singular

Plural

Name: Section: Dale:

252 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 31

9. Provide a complete synopsis of fero, ferre, tuE, latum, in the second

person singular.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

Active

Passive

SUBJUNCTIVE
Active

Passive

10. Translate the above synopsis of fero, ferre, tuli, latum, to carry, in the
second person singular; use "may," "might," "may have," and "might
have," for the subjunctives (though the actual translation of a
subjunctive, of course, depends upon the type of clause in which it is

employed).

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Piupf.

Active

Passive

SUBJUNCTIVE
Active

Passive
 Cum Clauses; Fero 253

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late. Use when for cum, as always, if the verb is indicative; use since if
the verb is remember that the actual translation of cum
subjunctive, but
with the subjunctive depends upon the relationship between the actions
in the main and subordinate clauses. And remember that no subjunc-
tive auxiliaries are used in translating cum clauses.

1. cum elephantus dormlvit

Transformation:

Translation:

2. cum asses oblatl essent

Transformation:

Translation:

3. cum auxilia adferatis

Transformation:

Translation:

4. cum digitus doleret

Transformation:

Translation:

cum rumor relatus sit

Transformation:

Translation:

cum soles occiderant

Transformation:

Translation:

7. cum vTna usque biberent

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Date:

254 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 31

8. cum de exsilils rogabant

Transformation:

Translation:

9. cum quidem natam ferat

Transformation:

Translation:

10. cum invidiae minuantur

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Transform the ablative absolute or other participial phrase into a cum

clause with the verb in the appropriate tense, identify the type of
cum clause, and translate. E.g., Tant5 igne viso, omnes repente territl

sunt. > Cum tantus ignis vTsus esset, omnes repente territl sunt; causal
clause. > Since such a great fire had been seen, all were suddenly
fi-ightened.

1. Ex Italia denique missus, c5nsul tamen exsilium durum bene fert.

Transformation:

Clause type:

Translation:

2. Mensa exposita, istl rldicuh numquam dubitabant tantum vTnum

bibere quantum invenire poterant.

Transformation:

Clause type:

Translation:

Hostibus semel collatis, eo tempore ipso verbis dtirls responde-

runt atque repente pugnare coeperunt.
 Cum Clauses; Fero 255

Transformation:

Clause type:

Translation:

C. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses, and translate.

1 . Cum iste (esse; same time) vir ingenil mediocris, ta-

men eum semper ferebamus.

2. Cum consul in exsilium (mittere; exact same time),

nullum auxilium tum oblatum est.

3. Cum a hostibus (cognoscere: 3rd pers. pi., time be-

fore), amlcT se ad v5s nave furtim contulerunt.

4. Cum auxilium (ferre; 3rd pers. pi., time before),

uno anno haec moenia condere potuimus.

D. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . When they compared the rumors, they saw that they lacked any
truth.

Name: Section: Date:

 1

256 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 3

2. Although they brought help back to their friends, they could not
save them.

3. Since those men are envious, many good men are grieving.

4. At that very hour, when the soldiers were sleeping, they brought
us aid.

VIS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Which three nouns in the hst have produced Enghsh derivatives

identical to their bases?

2. Invidia > > "invidious."

3. Which word has a meaning in common with the conjunction

cum?
a. sTc b. ubi c. unde d. utrum ... an

4. WTiich noun has a meaning in common with rumor?

a. as b. fama c. fatum d. osculum

5. Which verb is an antonym of occido?

a. consumo b. contendo c. mollio d. surgo

6. Which adverb has a meaning in common with usque?

a. ita b. mox c. semper d. vero

B. Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., 'A 'laudatory" speech is full
of praise ").

1 . At a "conference" we persons with

similar interests.
 Cum Clauses; Fero 257

2. An "aquifer" is an underground layer of porous rock that

3. An "oblation" is a ritual of sacrifice or thanks-

giving.

4. To "collate" various manuscripts involves them

for comparison.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Cum hoc semel dlxissemus, ill! responderunt se pacem aequam

oblaturos esse.

2. Cum se in exsilium contulisset. tamen amicos novos mox invenit.

3. Cum amicitiam nobis offerant, eis auxilium mox offeremus.

4. Cum exposuisset quid peteret, negavistl tantum auxilium posse

oflferrl.

5. Cum consilia tua denique comprehendamus, dolemus ac Tnsidias

tuas non feremus.

6. Cum tantum auxilium populo obtulerim. comprehendisne cur

ceterT mihi invideant?

Name: Section: Dale:

258 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 31

7. VTnum quod iste apud se obtulit fuit tarn mediocre ut id bibere

prlmo non possemus.

Cum cognoverTs memoriam familiae esse perpetuam, scTs nos us-

que amaturos esse parentes utrum vivos an mortuds.

9. Cum parvus filius ea nocte dormiebat, pater ei dsculum dedit,

eum digito tetigit, atque tres asses in mensa eius posuit.

10. Cum ultimus sol noster occiderit, in morte usque dormiemus.

B. Answer these questions on "A Thousand Kisses," "Ringo," and "Witti-

cisms."

1 . In hoc quTnto carmine CatullT, poeta dlcit vTtam esse nihil sine

2. Rumores senum de vita atque amore sunt dignl uno

3. Poeta confert solem et lucem cum atque noctem

cum
4. Cum lux vTtae occiderit, quam diu erit nox nostra?

5. Comment briefly on the contrast between "one" and "many" in

Catullus 5 and on what the contrast may symbolize.

6. Cum Charinus dormiat, anulT sunt in

7. Quot anulos hie in duobus manibus fert?

a. sex b. trlginta c. sexaginta d. mllia multa

 Cum Clauses; Fero 259

Cum dlcit Damasippo, "Bene aetatem fert " Cicero vero putat
a. hoc vTnum non esse quadraginta annorum
b. hoc vTnum esse optimum
c. hoc vTnum esse antiquum
d. se plus huius vInT apud Damasippum usque cupiturum esse

Aurea mediocritas: The golden mean

Horace

I.

II

II

Name: Section: Date.

32
Formation and Comparison
of Adverbs; Vol6^ Mai6^
Nolo; Proviso Clauses

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of you should be able to

this lesson

1. Recognize, form, compare, and translate regular adverbs.

2. Recognize, form, and translate adverbs with irregular superlatives and
other adverbs with irregular comparisons.
3. Recognize and translate the uses of quant with comparative and super-
lative adverbs.

4. Recognize, form, and translate the irregular verbs void, nolo, and
maid.
5. Recognize and translate the uses of nolo in "negative commands."
6. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "proviso clause.''

Salve, discipula aut discipule! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you
have thoroughly studied Chapter 32 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them aloud. Dum-
modo linguam Latinam magnopere ames, eris usque felix!
 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs; Volo, Malo, Nolo; Proviso Clauses 261

GRAMMATICA
1 . While many adverbs have their own peculiar forms, often without
comparatives and superlatives or any English derivatives, and must
simply be memorized, many others can be compared and have posi-
tive degree forms composed either from first/second declension
adjectives, with the letter added to the adjective's
or from third declension adjectives with
added to the

2. Adverbs regularly formed from third declension adjectives with a

base in -nt- add only to form the positive degree.

3. Provide the positive degree adverb forms and translate.

Adjective Adverb English Adjective Adverb English

a. acerbus b. certus

c. brevis d. dlligens

e. similis f miser

g. potens h. sanus

i. par j. fidelis

4. For most adverbs that can be compared, the comparative degree adds
to the base and is thus identical to the neuter
nominative singular of the comparative

Superlative adverbs usually add the letter to the base

of the corresponding superlative

While some adverbs have their own peculiar forms in the

comparative or superlative and must simply be memorized, those
derived from irregular usually have similar
irregularities, but with adverbial endings.

Match.

Translation Degree

very bravely a. positive

rather bravely b. comparative
most bravely c. superlative
bravely
too bravely

Name: Section: Dale:

262 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 32

8. Provide the missing adverb forms and translate.

Positive Comparative Superlative

a. Latin aspere
English roughly

b. Latin mmime
English least

c. Latin ridicule

English ridiculously

d. Latin gravius

English more seriously

e. Latin felTciter

EngUsh happily

9. Quam is used with adverbs in essentially the same ways as with

; after comparatives the translation is

and superlatives the translation is as -ly as possible.

10. Identify the degree of these adverbs from the Practice and Review
sentences.

Adverb Degree Adverb Degree

a. Primo (sent. 1) b. fortiter (1)

c. Maxime (2) d. celerrime (3)

e. mehus (5) f certe(lO)

1 1 . Volo, to wish, want, is an irregular verb of the

conjugation; answer these questions on its irregularities.

a. It lacks voice forms entirely.

b. The system is entirely regular.

c. The only irregular present system forms are in the

tense indicative, subjunctive, and infinitive.

d. The imperfect subjunctive follows the usual rule, adding the

to the present

e. is the base for present system indicatives,

for present system subjunctives.
 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs; Void, Maid, Nolo; Proviso Clauses 263

12. Provide a complete synopsis of void, velle, volul, in the second person
singular.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Piupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE

13. Translate the above synopsis of vol5, to wish, in the second person
singular; use "may," "might," etc., for the subjunctives (though the
actual translation of a subjunctive, of course, depends upon the type
of clause in which it is employed).

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE

14. The compounds nolo and malo follow void closely, but have
vowels in their and have a few other
striking peculiarities, which (as seen in the Appendix to Wheelock's
Latin) are limited to the tense.

15. Provide a complete synopsis of nolo, nolle, n51ul, to be unwilling, in

the second person plural.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE

16. Provide a complete synopsis of malo, malle, malui, to prefer, in the

third person plural.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

Name: Section: Dale:

264 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 32

SUBJUNCTIVE

17. Both and malo lack imperatives, but nolo has the singular
volo
imperative and the plural imperative
both of which were commonly used with a infinitive to
express commands.

18. A proviso clause is a clause introduced by

or some other word (plus if negative)
,

and indicating a provisional circumstance on which the action in the

main clause is contingent; the verb in such a clause is regularly in the
mood.

19. As seen from the examples in the text, the verb in a proviso clause is

ordinarily translated into the mood in English, without

any subjunctive auxiliaries.

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then

translate.

1 . Custodiam celeriter vult.

Transformarion:

Translation:

2. Exercitus maxime nolet.

Transformation:

Translation:

dummodo id vere veils

Transformation:

Translation:

4. DTvites certe nolunt.

Transformation:

Translation:
 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs; Void, Maid, Nolo; Proviso Clauses 265

5. Pauper hoc maluerat.

Transformation:

Translation:

6. Dona iTberius praebebunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

7. Parem honorem promlsit.

Transformation:

Translation:

8. Invidiae dare patent.

Transformation:

Translation:

9. Digit! acriter dolebant.

Transformation:

Translation:

10. Exsilium male tulit.

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . Dummodo ex paupertate magnopere ne (dolere;

2nd pers. sg. pres.), apud Romanes beate vTvere poteris.

2. Leges quam aequissimas habere (sapiens; superla-

tive adverb) maluislis.

Name: . Section Dare

266 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 32

3. Cum vinum optimum in mensa exposuisset, amIcT tamen bibere

pnmo (nolere; perf.).

4. Cum exercitus auxilium ad pauperes repente adferre

(volo; same time), ceterT omnibus militibus gratias agere
(volo; impf.).

5. (nolo; sg. imper.) offerre auxilium mediocre illTs

pauperibus, cum tam maiora beneficia praebere vere possTs.

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . Our students can learn more quickly now, provided that they are
willing.

2. The army hesitated to promise more guards.

3. When the conspirators have been arrested, we will soon learn

what leader they preferred.

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1. G15ria: "glory" ::cust6dia:

 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs; Void, Malo, Nolo; Proviso Clauses 267

2. Which verb is close in meaning to praebed?

a. confer© b. consOmo c. offero d. refero

3. Which verb has a meaning in common with void?

a. cupio b. dormio c. invideo d. minuo

B. Complete each statement with an EngUsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. If a defendant's guilt is "patent," it is to everyone.

2. A plea of "nolo contendere" indicates that the defendant is

to contest the charges against him.

3. An artist who is "peerless" is without

4. To act on one's own "volition" is to do what one is

to do.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the Hmits of sound Enghsh idiom.

1. HI dlvitias celerrime invenerunt; ill! diOtissime erunt pauperes.

2. Iste plurimos honores quam facillime accipere vult.

3. Tyrannus cTves suos ita male opprimebat ut usque vellent ITberl

esse.

4. Semel rogavit mTliles utrum pro patria fortiter occidere vellent an

nollent.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

268 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 32

5. PaucTs elephantls vTvTs, exercitum tamen trans montes in Italiam

ducere voluit.

6. Vult scire unde furtim veniant atque quantum auxilium ferant.

7. NolTte usque rogare quid promissuri simus.

8. Dummodo haec facere vere malls, tibi parem occasionem

praebebo.

B. Answer these questions on "The Character of Cimon," "A Vacation,"

and "Please Don't."
. . .

1 Quid Cimon non habuit?

a. iTberalitas in pauperes b. apud milites
auctoritas
c. custodiae in hortibus d. mors omnibus acerba

2. Cum Cimon occidisset, quid elves egerunt?

a. diu fuerunt trlstes b. memoriam eius neglexerunt
c. famam eius deleverunt d. facta eius culpaverunt

3. Cur Martialis ex urbe discedit?

a. ut in agrls laboret b. ut Ndmentum videat
c. ne Linum videat d. ut cum Lino sit
4. Quid Martialis ex Mamerco vult?
a. quidquid Mamercus vult b. audlre nihil
c. plurima carmina d. esse auditor eius

Citius, altius, fortius: Swifter, higher, stronger

Motto of the modem Olympic games
33
Conditions

INTELLEGENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. Define "conditional sentence."
2. Recognize, distinguish among, and translate the six basic types of
Latin conditional sentences.

Salve, discipule discipulave! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you

have thoroughly studied Chapter 33 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized the
new vocabulary by practicing aloud. SI LatTnam maxime amabis, diurissime
eris fellx!

GRAMMATICA
1 . A condition is a very common sentence type, consisting of two
clauses: 1) a condition or a subordinate clause usually
introduced by (meaning ) or, if negative,
by (meaning or
), and stating a hypothetical action or circumstance, and
2) a conclusion or the main clause, which expresses the
anticipated outcome if the premise should turn out to be true.

2. There are a total of basic conditional sentence types,

with their verbs in the indicative mood and
with their verbs in the subjunctive.

Name: Section: Date:

270 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 33

3. Conditions in the mood are more likely to be realized;

conditions are either less likely to be realized or even
contrary to the actual facts of a situation.

Although the Romans did sometimes use "mixed conditions" with

different tenses or moods in the protasis and apodosis, the basic types
of conditions employed the same tense and mood in both clauses;
match.

Condition Type Tenses

simple fact present a. present subjunctive
simple fact past b. present indicative
simple fact future c. perfect or imperfect indicative
("future more vivid") d. pluperfect subjunctive
contrary to fact, present e. future (or fut. perf ) indicative
contrary to fact, past f imperfect subjunctive
future less vivid
("should-would")

In the simple fact conditions, the verbs in both protasis and

apodosis are translated quite straightforwardly as indicatives; the
following pairs of auxiliaries are employed, however, in the
protasis and apodosis of the contrary to fact and less vivid

conditions.

Condition Type English Auxiliaries

contrary to fact, present a. should . would
. .

contrary to fact, past b. were . . . would

future less vivid c. had . . . would have

In the simple fact future condition, the verb of the protasis is usually
translated in the tense, even though in Latin the tense is

Identify the type of the 1 1 "further examples" presented in the

chapter's discussion of conditions.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11.
 .

Conditions 271

Give the sentence number and identify the specific type of all six

conditions in Practice and Review sentences 1-11.

Sent. No. Condition Type

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late, with careful attention to verb tenses and the correct auxiliaries.

1 sT dives recusavisset

Transformation:

Translation:

2. nisi pauperes traderent

Transformation:

Translation:

3. sT paria auxilia praebent

Transformation:

Translation:

4. nisi vTna mera biberent

Transformation:

Translation:

sT custodia stulte dormit

Transformation:

Translation:

Same: Section: Date:

272 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 33

6. sT plebes vere noluissent

Transformation:

Translation:

7. sT philosophl malint

Transformation:

Translation:

8. nisi elephantus occidet

Transformation:

Translation:

sT digit! male doluerunt

Transformation:

Translation:

10. sT opes diutius offerant

Transformation:

Translation:

Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . ST exercitus ad plebes opem (adferre; future less

vivid), pauperes certissime non (recusare).

2. Nisi philosophus se in exsilium (conferre; contrary

to fact, past), is atque amlcT celeriter (occidere).

3. Nisi tu ipse usque (invidere; contrary to fact, pres-

ent), non (esse) tanta invidia atque rumores mall
contra te.

Nisi opem promittere (volo; future more vivid),

plus plebis, heu, (dolere) atque paupertas per ur-

bem (patere).
 .

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . If you refuse that help, you will surrender your freedom.

2. If you should refuse that help, you would surrender your freedom.

3. If you had refused that help, you would have surrendered your
freedom.

4. If you were refusing that help, you would be surrendering your

freedom.

5. Since you refused that help, you are surrendering your freedom.

6. Provided that you do rK)t refuse that help, you will not surrender
your freedom.

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 An antonym of initium is

a. finis b. invidia c. sal d. speculum

2. Suavis > > "suavity," which means _

3. Which adverb is synonymous with subito?
a. postea b. repente c. semel d. usque

Name: Section: Date:

 .

274 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 33

4. Complete the analogy -que : et : : -ve:

5. Which noun has a meaning related to plebs?

a. exercitus b. miles c. populus d. senatus

6. Which verb is an antonym of recuse?

a. accipio b. doleo c. invideo d. refero

7. Which adjective does not have a related meaning?

a. bellus b. candidus c. merus d. pulcher

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1. Those who live in "opulence" have great

A "saUnometer" measures the amount of in a chem-

ical solution.

Something "traditional" has been

from one generation to the next.

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . O turpissime, sT te in speculo semel videas, heu, Veritas morum tu-

orum pateat!

2. Apud me iterum optime cenabis, ml amice, sT vTnum suavissimum

et merissimum, cenam candidam, atque plurima verba felicia te-

cum referes — nam verba iucunda certe sunt sal verum et cenae et

vTtae!
 Conditions 275

3. Nisi tarn mediocres libros in adulescentia legisses, ab initio

scrlptor melior fuisses.

4. Si quis auxilium opesve offerret, plebs esset beatior.

5. ST Latlnam nunc amas, nemo esse fortunatior potest!

B. Answer these questions on "B.Y.O.B.," "The Rich Get Richer," "Aris-

totle," and "Your Loss"

1. Quern Catullus ad cenam invTtat? (Responde in tota sententia.)

2. Amicus CatullT bene cenabit, dummodo cenam

a. amet b. condat c. ferat d. consumat

3. Catullus habet plus

a. aranearum b. cenae c. salis d. pecuniae

4. Quid FabuUus esse volet?

a. amicus CatullI b. amores merl c. unguentum d. nasus

5. Cur?
a. ut sit suavior b. ut unguentum olfaciat
c. ne sit sine cena d. ut cenam olfaciat
6. Quis, in carmine Martialis, plus divitiarum recipiet?
a. pauper b. Aemilianus c. Martialis d. dives

7. Quae studia, ut Quintilianus narrat. rex Philippus maxime

dUexit?
a. prima initia studiorum b. summa studia philosophiae
c. summa studia litterarum d. studia in senectute

8. Quis, ut Cicero ait, Tarentum primo cepit?

9. Quis urbem denique vicit?

10. Uter plus salis habuit?

Regem non faciunt opes: Riches do not make u kinf^

Seneca the Younger

Name: Section: Date:

34
Deponent Verbs; Ablative
with Special Deponents

INTELLECENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Define, recognize, form, and translate "deponent verbs."
2. Recognize, form, and translate deponent imperatives.
3. Define, recognize, form, and translate "semi-deponent verbs."
4. Define, recognize, and translate the "ablative with special deponents"
construction.

Salvete, discipulae discipuITque! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you

have thoroughly studied Chapter 34 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them aloud. Nisi
primd rem bene geretis, conamini, iterum conamini! (If at first you don't
succeed. . .
.)

GRAMMATICA

1 . Deponent verbs have chiefly forms with

meanings and only principal parts.
 Deponent Verbs; Ablative with Special Deponents 277

2. Deponents have the same four participles as regular verbs; while the
perfect passive participle usually follows the above rule, the other par-
ticiples involve the following exceptions:

Participle Form (Act./Pass.) Meaning (Act./Pass.)

a. present active participle

b. future active participle

c. fut. pass, participle

(gerundive)

3. Deponents have only three infinitives, one for each time frame, past,
present, future; while the and infinitives

follow the above rule for forms vs. meanings, the

infinitive has forms with meanings.

4. Passive imperative forms exist only for verbs; the

singular imperative is identical to the alternate person
singular form of the indicative tense, and the plural is

identical to the person form of the

indicative tense.

5. A deponent verb's singular imperative also resembles its (non-

existent) present active , with which it should not be
confused in translation.

6. Provide a complete synopsis of conor, cdnarl, c5natus sum, to try, in

the third person singular.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE

Translate the above synopsis of conor, conarl, conatus sum, to try, in

the third person singular; use "may," "might," etc., for the
subjunctives (though the actual translation of a subjunctive, of
course, depends upon the clause type).

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

r
278 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 34

8. Give the participles of patior, pati, passus sum, to endure, and

translate.

Active Passive

Latin
Present

Perfect

Future

English
Present

Perfect

Future

9. Give the infinitives and imperatives of loquor, loqui, locutus sum, to

speak, and their English translations.

Infinitives Imperatives
Latin English Latin English

Present Sg

Perfect PI

Future

10. Semi-deponent verbs are regular in the system but

deponent in the system.

1 1 List and translate all the deponent and semi-deponent verbs in

Practice and Review sentences 1-6.

Latin English Latin English

12. The five special deponent verbs that take an ablative "object"
(actually an ablative of means) are. in alphabetical order:

, , , , and
 .

Deponent Verbs; Ablative with Special Deponents 279

3. Give the sentence number and identify the four ablatives with special
deponents in Sententiae Antlquae 1-14.

Sent. No. Ablative with Special Deponent

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late, with careful attention to verb tenses and the correct auxiliaries.

1 anima e corpore egrediatur

Transformation:

Translation:

2. De remissione arbitratur.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Vocibus Claris locuti sunt.

Transformation:

Translation:

Exercitus proficTscebatur.

Transformation:

Translation:

Custodiae (dat.) fatetur.

Transformation:

Translation:

6. Natl sunt iTberT.

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Date.

 .

280 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 34

7. Dives rusticabitur.

Transformation:

Translation:

pauper te sequeretur

Transformation:

Translation:

9. vinis meris usT sint

Transformation:

Translation:

10. Par consilium molltur.

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Supply the correct form for the verbs in parentheses and translate.

1 Exercitus ad Tnsulam mox (proficTscT; fut.).

2. Cum vTno suavT, autem, aqua (utl; 1st pers. pi. perf ).

3. Pauperes sedere (hortarl; 1st pers. sg. perf), sed re-

cusaverunt.

4. Remissionis causa ex urbe discessimus et (rusticarl;

impf.).

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . About to die, he dared to speak freely.

2. Having started from the city, they suddenly followed the enemy.
 .

Deponent Verbs; Ablative with Special Deponents 281

3. They will enjoy both the water and the wine.

4. His son was bom while they were living in the country.

vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Complete the analogy vox loquor : : : mens :

a. arbitror b. cresc5 c. trado d. sequor

2. Which verb is synonymous with egredior?

a. discedo b. fateor c. molior d. specto

3. Which noun is an antonym of morior?

a. moHor b. nascor c. occido d. recuso

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1 When a disease is in "remission," it has its hold on

the patient.

2. "Post-natal" care is provided by a physician

., whereas "pre-natal" care is administered

3. A cum "adversative" clause describes an action to

what you would expect, in view of the action in the main clause.

4. An "animated" cheerleader has lots of team

5. The "conative" sense of the imperfect tense implies an action

in the past.

6. An "excrescense" has abnormally the

surface of a plant or an animal's body.

7. A "loquacious" person a lot; in a "soliloquy" he

Name Section: Date:

 —

282 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 34

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Arbitratur mala paupertatis adversae non patienda esse.

2. Talia verba vocibus trlstibus loctitT, profectl sumus ne in e5 loco

misero moreremur.

3. Omnibus opibus nostris utamur ut patria nostra quam celerrime

servetur.

4. IstT miseri, qui in tall paupertate nati sunt, nunc quoque— heu
in eadem paupertate moriuntur!

5. DTvitiae tuae certe crescent, dummodo pecuniam bona fide c6n-

servare coneris.

6. Ut ego arbitror, Uber bonus est remissio animae.

7. Nisi morl vTs — vae tibi — nunc fatere omnia vitia culpasve!

8. Roman! urbem candidissimam magno cum labore molltl sunt.

 Deponent Verbs; Ablative with Special Deponents 283

B. Answer these questions on the readings from Martial. Seneca, and Ca-
tullus.

1. Explain how word order gives the Zoilus epigram the sort of sur-
prise ending that is typical of Martial.

2. Quis Fabullam maxime laudat?

3. "Polysyndeton" is the use of more conjunctions than usual, to

achieve some sort of emphasis; how is this device effectively em-
ployed in Martial 1.64?

4. De quo prlncipe Seneca in hoc loco scnpsit?

5. Cum princeps comoedos audlret, quid fecit?

a. mortuus est b. ultimum verbum locutus est
c. se concacavit d. haec omnia

6. In hoc carmine CatullI, quis est similis deo?

a. Lesbia ipsa b. vir qui cum Lesbia sedet
c. Catullus ipse d. rex beatus

7. Cum Catullus Lesbiam spectat auditque, cur loquT non potest?

a. lingua torpet b. igne consumitur
c. aures tintinant d. ea videtur par deo

8. What is actually happening to the speaker in 1 1-12 and how is

the metaphor in gemina nocte especially effective?

. . .

Et mihi res, n5n me rebus, subiungere conor:

And I try to subordinate life to myself, not myself to life

Horace

Name: Section: Date:

35
Dative with Adjectives;
Dative with Special Verbs;
Dative with Compounds

INTELLECENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Explain the basic function of the dative case.

2. Define, recognize, and translate the "dative with adjectives" con-

struction.
3. Define, recognize, and translate the "dative with special verbs" con-
struction.
4. Define, recognize, and translate the "dative with compounds" con-
struction.

Salvete, discipulae discipuUque! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you

have thoroughly studied Chapter 35 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the Ust of special verbs governing the dative case and all the new vocab-
ulary by practicing them aloud. Credite mihi — studete LatTnae et semper sa-
pietis!
 Dative with Adjectives; Dative with Special Verbs; Dative with Compounds 285

GRAMMATICA
The dative case is in general employed to indicate the person or thing
that some action or circumstance applies to or refers to ,

as opposed to the accusative which indicates the direct object of an

action.

An adjective indicating attitude, relation, or quality may take a noun

or pronoun in the dative case to indicate, literally or figuratively, the
in which the adjective applies; such adjectives in English
are usually followed by the words , , or

3. Which adjective is least likely to take a dative?

a. alius b. carus c. fidelis d. similis

4. Several special Latin verbs, most of them indicating attitude or rela-

noun or pronoun in the dative case, where in English
tionship, take a
we would expect a object; these Latin verbs, however,
are generally intransitive and their dative "objects" actually indicate
the person (or thing) to whom (or which) the attitude

5. Many compound noun or pronoun in the dative case, es-

verbs take a
pecially when meaning of the compound verb is significantly
the
from that of its simple form; often the dative appears to
function as a sort of object of the prepositional though
the preposition would take a different case if separate from the verb. If
the simple verb is transitive, the compound sometimes takes, in addi-
tion to the dative, an case noun or pronoun as direct ob-
ject of the root verb.

6. List the five uses of the dative case learned thus far.

Give the sentence number and identify the 10 dative nouns and
pronouns and their specific uses in Practice and Review sentences
1-11.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

286 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 35

Sent. No. Dative Dative Case Use

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late, with careful attention to verb tenses and the correct auxiliaries.

1 Tall praemio studebat.

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Natae meae virls nubent.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Huic ilium anteponit.

Transformation:

Translation:

Ignosce amico Trato.

Transformation:

Translation:
 Dative with Adjectives; Dative with Special Verbs; Dative with Compounds 287

5. NolT imperare mihi!

Transformation:

Translation:

6. heu, vobTs noceant

Transformation:

Translation:

7. hostibus parceremus

Transformation:

Translation:

imperatorl paruissem

Transformation:

Translation:

9. Audltoribus persuademus.

Transformation:

Translation:

10. Natae candidae subrTdet.

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1. ST quis tantum (pecunia) serviet — vae miserum!-

pectus numquam erit ITberum.

2. Aestas est tempus nobis iucundum quod (discipu-

lus; pi.) atque (magister; pi.) coruni placet.

Name: Section: Dati

288 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 35

3. ST salvere ac sapere vis, fovete animas atque nolTte

(corpus; pi.) nocere.

4. Mlror te (amicitia; sg.) dlvitias semper anteponere.

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . Let us first obey our hearts.

2. The more faithful guards served him well.

3. The very angry father suddenly forgave his son.

4. That student always studies Latin with the greatest care.

VJS VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 . Complete the analogy casa ianua : : : urbs :

a. fenestra b. porta c. remissio d. via

2. Which verb is synonymous with impero?

a. arbitror b. cresco c. iubeo d. egredior

3. Which verb is an antonym of noceo?

a. iuv5 b. molior c. patior d. trado

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. True "students" (like you!!) are for learning.

 Dative with Adjectives; Dative with Special Verbs; Dative with Compounds 289

2. A ''janitor" literally watches the , and "January" is

the into the new year.

3. A "pectoral" is armor or an ornament worn over the

4. An "innocuous" remark is intended to do any

5. A "nubile" young lady is ready for

6. An "implacable" tyrant can be

7. A bear hibernates in the winter; some animals "estivate" in the

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. Cum familia nostra aestate rusticaretur, sub sole candido iaceba-

mus et mare cum voluptate spectabamus.

2. Audltores magna voce hortatus est, sed eum sequT proficTscTve ex

urbe recusaverunt.

3. Sedeamus loquamurque de hac occasione optima, atque die

utamur!

4. Ille prTnceps natus est temporibus adversTs sed felTcissima aetate

mortuus est.

Name: Section: Date

290 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 35

5. Fatetur se plurimis nocuisse, sed nunc ceteris parcere et nobis

omnibus placere vult.

6. lUe servus, qui semper fuit mihi cams, ftlio meo servlvit et eum
servare conatus est.

7. SI quis hunc laborem suscepisset, multls pepercisset.

8. SI Deum nobis ignoscere volumus, nos debemus alils hominibus

ignoscere.

9. Mihi nunc non credunt, neque umquam natae meae credere

volent.

10. Huic duel pareamus ut ndbis parcat et urbem quam celerrime

servet.

B. Answer these questions on the readings from Ovid, Cicero, and

Martial.

1. Ovidius loquitur de formis mutatis ab ad tem-

pora sua.
a. animo b. initio mundl c. mundo d. carmine suo

2. Quae a dels mutata sunt?

a. multae formae b. nova corpora
c. coepta poetae d. haec omnia

3. In loco a Cicerone scrlpt5, quis est "eum" (line 2)?

 Dative with Adjectives; Dative with Special Verbs; Dative with Compounds 291

4. Quis est "illam"?

5. Quid est "id"? _

6. Cum NasTca ad casam eius advenit. ubi fuit poeta Ennius?

(Responde in tota sententia.)

7. Quis in hac fabuia plus salis habet — Ennius NasTcave?

8. In prlmls duobus carminibus a Martiale scrlptls, qui
matrimonium petunt?

9. In his duobus carminibus, qui sapiunt?

Quis mox morietur?

10. Identify the polysyndeton in Martial 1.10 and comment on its

effect (see the Lectiones, Chapter 34, if you do not remember the
term).

11. In tertio carmine Martialis, qui sunt "turba"?

a. ludl b. magistrl c. puerl puellaeque d. discipull

Virtus praemium est optimum: Virtue is the best reward

Plautus

Name: Section: Date

 .

36
Jussive Noun Clauses; Fid

INTELLECENDA
Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to
1. hefine, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "jussive noun clause."

2. Recognize, form, and translate the irregular verb fid.

Salvete, lectores lectrTcesque carissimae! Before beginning these exercises, be

sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter 36 of Wheelock's Latin and mem-
orized both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them aloud.
Hortor vos ut laborem cum studio accedatis: sT id facietis, fietis sapientissiml
atque felTcissiml!

GRAMMAllCA
1 A jussive noun clause is a kind of command, a subordi-
nate clause introduced by or, if negative, ,

and with its verb in the mood. Such a clause reports

, not in a direct quotation, what someone has com-
manded, requested, advised, etc.

2. As an indirectly reported command, the jussive noun clause may be

compared conceptually with an indirect statement, which, however,
has introductory word and requires an
verb, and with an indirect question, which also takes a verb in the

mood, but which is introduced by an

word.
 Jussive Noun Clauses; Flo 293

The verb in the main clause that introduces a jussive noun clause ei-
ther commands, requests, advises, or otherwise expresses the wish of
its subject. Circle the eight verbs in the following list that commonly
introduce a jussive noun clause.

arbitror moneo quaero

foveo nubo rogo
hortor oro sequor
impero persuaded subrldeo
molior peto utor

Vol5, nold, and mal5 u siially take an ,

but sometimes
take a jussive noun clause; iube5 nearly always takes an

5. Jussive noun clauses are sometimes confused with

clauses, since they are identical in appearance; the jussive noun
clause, however, always has the sort of introductory verb indicated
above and serves as the noun object of that verb, answering the
question , rather than serving adverbially and
answering the question

Jussive noun clauses are easily distinguished from simple jussive

clauses (Chapter 28), since the latter are clauses that
give direct commands rather than clauses in which
commands are reported

Though sometimes translated as an English noun clause introduced

by "that," the Latin jussive noun clause is usually translated with no
word (except "not," if the clause is negative) and with
the verb transformed to an

Give the sentence number and identify the 1 1 subjunctive verbs and
their specific types in Practice and Review sentences 1-10.

Sent. No. Subjunctive Clause Type

Name: Section: Date:

294 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 36

Fi6, an irregular verb meaning to occur, happen, become, was

commonly used by the Romans in place of the passive of the present
system of the verb , and so also has the passive
meanings , ,

even though it is in form; answer these questions on its

irregularities.

a. The system of fio is supplied by the perfect passive

system of

b. The system is irregular and must be memorized.

c. The stem vowel is long in all present system forms

except , , and the
subjunctive.

10. Provide a complete synopsis of fio, fieri, factus sum, in the third
person singular.

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE

1 1 . Translate the above synopsis of fio, using the meaning to become, in

the third person singular; use "may," "might," etc., for the sub-
junctives (though the actual translation of a subjunctive, of course,
depends upon the type of clause in which it is employed).

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE
 tussive Noun Clauses; Flo 295

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then trans-

late. For all the jussive noun clauses except number 10 (where you must
use "that" as the introductory word), you can use the rule outlined
above, i.e., translate the verb as an with no introductory word
infinitive,

except, for a negative clause, "not." Note that one of these does not
contain a jussive noun clause — do you know which one and why?

1 . Hortabor te ne accedas.

Transformation:

Translation:

Curate ut dies carpatis.

Transformation:

Translation:

6r6 eum ut fiat vir melior.

Transformation:

Translation:

4. Monuit te ut hostem contunderes.

Transformation: '.

Translation:

5. Rogo eum ut librum exigat.

Transformation:

Translation:

Petit a te ne ilium cogas.

Transformation:

Translation:

7. Quaerebas ab eo ut conaretur.

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Dale:

296 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 36

8. lussT eum requlrere te.

Transformarion:

Translation:

9. Moneo earn ut se recreet.

Transformation:

Translation:

10. Decemunt ut egrediaminl.

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Supply the correct form for the verbs in parentheses and translate.

1. Els persuasimus ne el (nocere; 3rd pers. pi.).

2. Lectores hortor ut magna voce (loqui; 3rd pers.

pi.).

3. Ab ea quaesiveram ut mihi (ignoscere; 3rd pers.

sg.).

4. Imperavit el ne potentior (fieri; 3rd pers. sg.).

5. Monesne me ut tibi (parere; 1st pers. sg.)?

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. Persuade her to become your friend.

2. Warn him not to despise our leaders.

 .

Jussive Noun Clauses; Flo 297

3. They ordered (impero) him to spare those soldiers.

4. The woman begged him to cheer up their daughter.

5. We urged them to confess the plot without fear.

V/5 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Which adverb does not belong?

a. cotldie b. numquam c. saepe d. semper

2. A synonym of cupTd5 is
a. anima b. cupiditas c. pectus d. remissio

3. An antonym of fortasse is

a. certe b. heu c. semel d. vae

4. An antonym of accedo is

a. antepono b. cresco c. egredior d. rusticor

5. A synonym of oblect5 is

a. mlror b. nascor c. placeo d. studeo

6. Identify the third declension -io nouns derived from the fourth
principal part of the following verbs, and then give their direct En-
glish derivatives and their literal meanings.

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. contundo

b. or5

c. recreo

d. require

Identify the third declension -or nouns derived from the fourth
principal part of the following verbs, and then give their direct
English derivatives and their literal meanings.

Name: Section: Date:

 .

298 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 36

Latin Noun Eng. Noun Translation

a. euro

b. oro

B. Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 An "excerpt," metaphorically, is something

a crop.

2. A "lectern" is hterally a stand used for

3. A "cogent" argument is persuasive because it

all the evidence in a compelling manner.

4. An evening "serenade" should your emotions and

thus make you feel "serene."

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as hterally as
possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Petlvit ab amico Trato ne eos miserrimos in vinculls servitutis te-

nerent.

2. Hortor te ut sapias ac ea aestate remissionis causa ex urbe pro-

ficlscaris.

3. Imperavit servo ut ad ianuam adversam cotldie sederet et casam

spectaret.
 .

Jussive Noun Clauses; Fid 299

4. Noll patT eos, qui tibi tarn male servTverunt, talia praemia ac-
cipere.

5. Carmina illTus lectrlcis audTtores semper oblectani atque pectora

serenant recreantque.

6. Te oro ut fias discipulus quam sapientissimus, cupTdines stultas

contemnas, atque omnem diem carpas.

7. Senex hortatus est Romanes ut feroces cogerent, eos ex Italia ex-

igerent, et superbos contunderent, sed omnibus ceteris par-
cerent.

8. Deus decrevit ut lux fieret, atque lux Candida facta est.

9. Cura ut cotldie fias sapientior et beatior et amlcTs iucundior.

10. ST fortasse requTris quid faciam, accede et tibi dlcam.

B. Answer these questions on the selections from Martial, Catullus, Hor-

ace,and Cicero.

1 In prlmo carmine, quid AvTtus in libro Martialis inveniet?

a. bona b. mediocria c. mala d. haec omnia

2. In carmine secundo, quid Martialis cum libellTs suTs confert?

3. Quocum cocus confertur?

Name: _ Section: Dale:

300 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 36

4. In tertio carmine, quot verba (verbs) sunt? (Responde in Latina.)

5. List all the verbs in Catullus 85 in two groups, those that suggest
feeling/passion/suifering and those that suggest knowing/reason/
doing.
Feeling/suffering:
Knowing/doing:
Comment on the arrangement of these two categories of verbs
within the poem and on the effect of the contrast.

6. In quarto carmine, quid Celer maxime vult?

a. audlre carmina Martialis b. recitare carmina Martialis
c. recitare carmina sua d. Martialem recitare carmina eius

7. Explain briefly what Horace means by a man who is in se ipso

totus.

8. Qui sunt tres coniuratl in oratione Ciceronis?

9. Quibus Lentulus imperavit ut equitatum in Italiam mitterent?

10. Cui imperavit ut ad urbem mllites duceret?

Laborare est orare: To work is to pray

Motto of the Benedictine Monks
37
Conjugation of Eo;
Constructions of Place
and Time

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

7. Recognize, form, and translate the irregular verb eo.
2. Define, recognize, and translate the various place and time construc-
tions discussed in the chapter, including "place where," "place to which,"
"place fi-om which," the "ablative of time when or within which," and the "ac-
cusative of duration of time."
3. Define, recognize, form, and translate the "locative case."
4. Explain the special rules for place constructions involving the names of
cities, towns, small islands, and the three nouns domus, humus, and rus.

Salvete, lectrlces lectdresque iucundissimi! Before beginning these exercises,

be sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter 37 of Wheelock's Latin and
memorized both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them
aloud. Sper5 vds a studid ac amore linguae Latlnae numquam abiturds esse!

Name: — Section: Date:

302 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 37

GRAMMATICA

1. E6, ire, to go, is an irregular verb of the conjugation;

answer these questions on its irregularities.

a. The voice is relatively uncommon, except in transi-

tive and so is not presented in our text.

b. The normal present stem changes to

before the vowels , and , throughout the present sys-
tem as well as in the gerund and all forms of the present parti-
ciple except the singular of the case.

c. The future tense has the endings of a or

conjugation verb.

d. The system is formed regularly, except that the

vowel combination before s usually contracts to

2. Provide a complete synopsis of eo, Ire, u, itum, in the third person sin-
gular.
I
INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf. j

SUBJUNCTIVE

3. Translate the above synopsis of eo, to go, in the third person singular;
use "may," "might," etc., for the subjunctives (though the actual
translation of a subjunctive, of course, depends upon the type of
clause in which it is employed).

INDICATIVE
Present Future Impf. Perfect Fut.Perf. Plupf.

SUBJUNCTIVE
 Conjugation ofEo; Constructions of Place and Time 303

Provide the indicated information for regular Latin place

constructions.

Construction Case Prepositions

a. from which

b. to which

c. where

To indicate place where, the Romans used the locative case with the
names of , and ,

, as well as with the three nouns ,

, and

6. For the singular of and declension

nouns, the locative is identical to the case; elsewhere it

is usually identical to the

7. Provide the indicated information for Latin place constructions

involving the place names and special nouns discussed in the text.

Construction Case Prepositions

a. from which

b. to which

c. where

8. Domus is noun with some endings of the

a slightly irregular
declension and some of the List the
forms most commonly used for the following place constructions.

Construction Form of Domus

a. from which

b. to which

c. where

9. The locative singular of rus is either or

10. For time when or within which, as we have already learned, the
case is used, with preposition; and the
prepositions , or
are commonly employed in English translation.

Name _ Section Date

 .

304 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 37

11. To indicate duration of time, i.e., how long a period of time an action
occurs, the case is employed, with
preposition; in English translation the preposition is

sometimes employed, sometimes omitted.

12. The duration of time construction was often employed with the Latin
word to indicate a person's

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate these brief sentences.

Translation

1. Athenas fortasse iit.

2. Tori's ablre tibi licet.

3. Hum! unam horam sedebat.

4. Eo tempore rure redierunt.

5. DomI uno die periit.

6. Natus decem annos, mortem obiit.

7. Domo Irate exibamus.

8. Athenls exierant et Romae vTxit.

9. Rure requiescere soles.

10. Domum panels horis adlbis.

1 1 SyracusTs eo die interfectus est.

12. Romam cotldie inlbatis.

13. Multos dies peregrlnabamur.

14. In itinere grato abeamus!

15. Servus e vinculTs exiit.

B. Supply the correct form of the word in parentheses and translate.

1. Fratermens (Athenae) abiit et

(Roma) accedit.
 .

Conjugation of Ed; Constructions of Place and Time 305

(Roma) adit ut domum idoneum requlrat.

3. (domus) abierat, cum parentes essent absentes.

4. Deinde (Athenae) rediit et libellum exegit.

5. Denique aut (domus) aut (rus)

pereamus.

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1 . My friends left home within three hours.

2. They will remain in Rome for a few days.

3. Let us return to Athens in one year.

4. He will go to Syracuse for seven days.

5. One may travel abroad for many years.

V75 VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 A synonym of domus is

a. casa b. cupTdo c. ianua d. lectrTx

2. Which noun has a meaning related to humus?

a. aestas b. pectus c. praemium d. terra

Name: Section: Date:

306 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 37

3. Which verb has a meaning related to eo?

a. antepono b. carpo c. cedo d. cogo

4. Which verb is nearly synonymous with abeo?

a. contemno b. contundo c. decemo d. discedo

5. Which is a synonym of exeo?

a. euro b. egredior c. foveo d. mlror

6. Which is a synonym of pereo?

a. impero b. occido c. parco d. pareo

7. Which is a synonym of interficio?

a. fio b. ignosco c. neco d. noceo

8. Which is a synonym of adeo?

a. accedo b. nubo c. sereno d. subrTdeo

9. Which has a meaning in common with peregrlnor?

a. sapio b. recreo c. oblecto d. erro

10. Which has a meaning in common with redeo?

a. studeo b. servio c. revenio d. or5

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 . An "itinerary" provides details of a traveler's

2. An "insolent" person does behave in the

manner.

3. "Illicit" behavior is

4. To "exhume" a corpse is to remove it the

5. A "requiem" is sung to bring to the souls of the

dead.
 Conjugation of Ed; Constructions of Place and Time 307

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . Conabatur persuadere els ut Roma paucTs horls exTrent, sed plu-

rimos dies erant immotl.

2. Cena illls amlcls gratissimls ita placet ut domum redlre nolint.

3. Cum niius ftliaque rurl paucos dies peregrlnarentur, ad multa

loca parentibus absentibus idonea adierunt.

4. Dummodo in exsilium a prlncipe ne missus sit, licet el Romam

inlre.

5. Nisi domum Ire potes, apud me requiescere tibi licet.

6. Totam aestatem AthenTs esse solitl sumus.

7. Corpus illTus mllitis interfecti, qui vlgintl annos natus mortem

obiit et hum! nunc iacet, sub humo mox in pace requiescat.

8. Frater fuit els tam gratus ut, cum Roma ablsset, nihil eos serenare
posset.

Name: Section: Dale:

 J7\

308 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 37

B. Answer these questions on the readings from Martial, Petronius, and

Cicero.

1 . Cum MartiaHs carmina sua recitat, cuius carmina Caecihanus re-

citat? (Responde in tota sententia.)

2. Cuius carmina MartiaHs hortatur eum ut recitet?

a. MartiaHs b. MarsT c. CatuUl d. sua

3. Cuius TnscrTptio a Trimalchione legitur?

a. PompeiT Magnl b. Fortunatae c. uxoris suae d. sua

4. Quis de Tnscrlptione prlmo flebat?

a. Trimalchio b. Fortunata c. Habinnas d. famiHa

5. Estne locus trlstis aut rldiculus? Cur? (Responde Anglice, i.e., in

English. )

6. In litterTs Ciceronis, unde Licinius fugit?

7. Ad quern urbem prlmo adit?

8. Quis Licinium comprehendit?

9. Quid Cicero ex fratre vult? (Anglice.)

Exeat aula qui vult esse pius — virtus et sununa potestas non coeunt:
Let him depart from the imperial palace who wishes to be pious
— virtue and supreme power do not go together
Lucan
38
Relative Clauses of
Characteristic; Dative of
Reference; Supines

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "relative clause of char-
acteristic."

2. Define, recognize, and translate the "dative of reference" construction.

3. Define, recognize, form, and translate "supines."

Salve, lector aut lectrix fidelis! Before beginning these exercises, be sure you
have thoroughly studied Chapter 38 of Wheelock's Latin and memorized
both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them aloud. Ut
finem huius librT accedis — mirabile dictu — scientia tua linguae Latlnae cdtidie
fit sublTmior!

GRAMMATICA
1. TTie type of relative clause introduced in Chapter 17 provides some
factual description of its antecedent, an actual person or thing. By

Name: Section: Date:

310 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 38

contrast, the relative clause of characteristic, a subordinate clause in-

troduced by a , describes some
quahty of an antecedent that is itself either
, , , or and
which, accordingly, has its verb in the mood.

2. In translating the verb in a relative clause of characteristic, the auxil-

iary is frequently (but not always) employed, and some
phrase like or
should often be supplied
before the relative pronoun to make it clear that its antecedent is in-

definite.

3. Give the sentence number and identify the 14 subjunctive verbs and
their specific clause types in Practice and Review sentences 1-13.

Sent. No. Subjunctive Clause Type

4. A dative of reference or interest is a noun or pronoun in the dative

case which indicates a person (or a thing) to whom some statement
or from whose it is true, or to whom it

is of special

5. The dative of reference can sometimes be translated simply with the

 Relative Clauses of Characteristic; Dative of Reference; Supines 311

words or , but often the context requires

a phrase such as "in my opinion," "from your point of view," "in his
own heart," "as far as they are concerned," etc.

Give the sentence number and identify the eight dative nouns and
pronouns and their specific uses in Sententiae Antlquae 1-14.

Sent. No. Dative Case Use

7. The supine is a defective verbal of the

declension, formed on the same stem as the
and having only two forms in common
use, the and singular.

8. The ablative supine is used with the of certain

adjectives to indicate in what a particular quality is

applicable.

9. The accusative supine (which must be carefully distinguished from

the ) is used with verbs of
to indicate

10. Identify the two supines in the chapter's Practice and Review
sentences.

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then

translate.

1 . Is est qui multum queratur.

Transformation:

Translation:

Name: Section: Date.

 \

312 Workbook for Wbeelock's Latin: Chapter 38

2. Fuit nullus qui eum recognosceret.

Transformation:

Translation:

Eae sunt quae nihil metuant.

Transformation:

Translation:

Est qui onine vendat.

Transformation:

Translation:

HI non sunt qui nos impediant.

Transformation:

Translation:

Hoc est opus quod eum oblectet.

Transformation:

Translation:

Dolor est quern non ferre possim.

Transformation:

Translation:

8. Hae sunt domus quas requlratis.

Transformation:

Translation:

9. Qui sunt qui non redeant?

Transformation:

Translation:

10. Ilia erant itinera quae amarent.

Transformation:

Translation: ,
 Relative Clauses of Characteristic; Dative of Reference; Supines 313

B. Supply the correct form of the verb in parentheses and translate.

1. Sola est — mlrabile dictu! — quae tale odium

(metuo; pres. subj.).

2. Quis est cuius mens (esse; pres.) immota?

3. Puella grata quae hoc opus (exigo; perf ) rurl pere-

grlnatur.

4. Tibi nemo erat qui odio erga civitatem (cdgere;

impf pass.).

C. Translate into Latin; employ standard word order and include all ma-
crons.

1. There are many who do not hesitate to complain.

2. There are few who do not dread pain.

3. Who is there who does not esteem dignity?

4. There was no one who was willing to go either to Athens or to

Syracuse.

S'ame: Section: Date

 . .. :

314 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 38

Vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Odium > > "odious."

2. ^^TOT > mirabUis, remarkable iiamo >

3. Which adjective has a meaning in common with pristinus?

a. absens b. antlquus c. idoneus d. TnfTrmus

4. Which is a synonym of metuo?

a. adeo b. euro c. soleo d. timeo

5. Which verb is an antonym of impedio?

a. abeo b. interficio c. iuvo d. recreo

6. Which is an antonym of queror?

a. sereno b. requiesco c. obeo d. gaudeo

7. Which verb has a meaning related to recognosco?

a. accedo b. fio c. intellego d. pereo

8. Complete the analogy oculus video :: pes : :

a. curro b. carpo c. contemno d. decemo

9 Contundo contusio : : : oro

10. Humilis humus :: subEmis

: :

a. aqua b. caelum c. cupTdo d. sator

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1 An "arboretum" is a garden where are grown for

display or study

2. A "querulous" person is always

3. One who sends his heartfelt "condolences" actually suffers

along the bereaved.

4. In a "cooperative" relationship one person

another.

5. "Quadrupeds" have
 Relative Clauses of Characteristic; Dative of Reference; Supines 315

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. Domum inlre tibi non licet, etsT visum amlcam tuam Is.

2. Exi foris, puer stulte: filia mea doml non adest!

3. Recognoscisne tibi dolorem, quern odium erga hos cTves fortasse

creet?

4. 111! sunt qui dlvitils dignitatem libenter anteponant.

5. Cotldie mihi metuebam — difficile dictu, heu— mortem patris

TnfTrmissiml.

6. Fuit multos annos Romae nemo qui opus nostrum suspendere

aut etiam impedlre posset.

7. Agricolae pristinl frOctus de arboribus carpebant et Romae ven-

debant.

8. Iste. mihi vir pessimus, de vinculTs in pedibus querebatur.

Name: Section: Date

316 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 38

luppiter, sator hominum deorumque, natae e caelo subllml

subrlsit — mlrabile dictu — atque earn verbis firmTs serenavit.

10. In oratione Cicero locutus est nihil metuendum esse quod animo
nocere non posset.

B. Answer these questions on the readings from Martial, Cicero, Pompey,

Caesar, and Catullus.

1. In carmine Martialis. quid bibliopola putat?

a. Martialem esse poetam b. Martialem esse poetam malum
c. Lucanum non esse poetam d. Lucanum esse poetam

2. Cur iste amicus, in prima fabula Ciceronis, de ficu surculos vult?

a. quod Reus amat b. ut amicum querentem impediat

c. ut uxorem suspendat d. quod uxor arbores amat

3. In secunda fabula Ciceronis. ea oratio

a. fuit digna misericordia b. veram misericordiam movit
c. misericordiam movere visa est d. haec omnia

4. A quibus hae epistulae ad Ciceronem scrlptae sunt?

5. Quid primus scrlptor Cicerdnem facere vult?

a. exercitum ad eum ducere b. consules ad Apuliam mittere
c. Brundisium adire d. cum Caesare se iungere

6. Quid auctor secundarum litterarum a Cicerone petit?

a. exercitum b. pecuniam c. consilium d. arma

7. Characterize Catullus" attitude toward Caesar in his poem 93.

a. zealous b. indifferent c. obsequious d. timid

Finis cordnat opus: The end crowns the work

Ovid
39
Gerund and Gerundive

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of you should be able to

this lesson
1. and translate "gerunds."
Define, recognize, form,
2. Distinguish gerunds from gerundives and gerund phrases from gerun-
dive phrases.
3. Recognize and translate gerund and gerundive phrases and supines, as
they are employed to indicate purpose.

Salve, discipula aut discipule Ilberalissime! Before beginning these exercises,

be sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter 39 of Wheelock's Latin and
memorized both the paradigms and the new vocabulary by practicing them
aloud. Hunc libellum diutissime legist! Latlnae discendae causa, et ad finem
feliciter mox advenies: carpe diem!

GRAMMATICA

1 . As you learned in Chapters 23 and 24, the

participle, also called the gerundive, is a fully declin-
able verbal ; commonly employed in the

conjugation with a dative o^ agent, the gerundive has a

variety of other uses discussed in this chapter.

Name: Section: Date:

318 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 39

2. By contrast, the gerund is a neuter verbal with mean-

ings in the voice and decUned only in the singular of
the , , and ,

cases.

3. These four forms of the gerund are to the correspond-

ing neuter forms of the

4. Corresponding to the English gerund in "-ing" ("running," "read-

ing," "living," etc.), the Latin gerund can be modified like a verb ("liv-

ing well") and take an object, etc. ("reading books"), while as a noun
it can be employed in a number of the various case uses; as a noun,

however, the gerund cannot be employed as a

., nor, since it lacks a case, as a
., two functions that are served by another verbal noun,
the

Match, to indicate some of the differences between gerunds and ge-

rundives.

verbal adjective a. gerund

verbal noun b. gerundive
four forms only
fully declinable

three genders
neuter only
active meanings
passive meanings

Give the basic English translation of the gerundive of orno, 5rnare, to

adorn, and then decline fully in Latin.

ENGLISH:
Masculine Feminine Neuter

Singular

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl. :
 Gerund and Gerundive 319

Plural

Norn.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

Abl.

Decline the gerund of orno, to adorn, in Latin and English.

Latin English

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

AW.
While a gerund plus direct object phrase is sometimes used in Latin

(habuit magnum amorem discendl Latinam, he had a great love of

learning Latin), theRomans commonly preferred to put the noun
object in the case in which the gerund would otherwise have
appeared and then to modify this noun with a (liabuit

magnum am5rem Latinae diseendae); the translation is the same no

matter which construction is used, since English idiom requires the
gerund construction rather than the unidiomatic {he
had a great love of Latin to be learned).

Translate the two sentences, indicate which contains the gerund,

which the gerundive, and circle the sentence that is in the form
preferred by the Romans.

a. Discimus legendo libros cum cura.

Gerund Gerundive (Check one)

b. Discimus librTs legendls cum cura.

Gerund Gerundive (Check one)

10. Commonly used to express purpose were phrases consisting either of

plus the case of the gerundive (or
gerund) or of plus the case of the
gerundive (or gerund).

Name: Section: Dale

 —

320 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 39

11. List the five gerundives in Practice and Review sentences 1-12; also
identify the nouns they modify and the specific use of each gerundive
phrase (e.g., object of preposition, purpose, etc.).

Sent. No. Gerundive Noun Modified Use

12. List the eight gerunds in Sententiae Antiquae 1-14 and identify the
specific case use of each.

Sent. No. Gerund Case Use

13. You have now learned six ways to express purpose in Latin: ut/ne
with the subjunctive; the supine (with verbs of motion); ad with the
accusative of the gerund (plus object, etc.); ad with the accusative of
a noun and gerundive; causa with the genitive of the gerund (plus
object, etc.); causa plus the genitive of a noun and gerundive. Using
venio, oppugno, and "They are coming
aedificium, translate into Latin
to assault the buildings" in these six different ways.

Subjunctive:

Supine: —
Ad + gerund:
 . 1

Gerund and Gerundive 32

Ad + gerundive:

Causa + gerund:

Causa + gerundive:

EXERCITATIONES

A. Translate the following brief sentences into idiomatic English

1 Athenas moenils oppugnandTs capiamus.

2. Mulier fructuum vendendorum causa ad urbem ambulat.

3. Ad iniuriam curandam ad medicum adiit.

4. Roma ablbunt ad peregrlnandum Syracusas.

5. Pernoctandl causa domum ineunt.

6. Experiendo discimus.

7. Vino ITbando deabus placuimus.

8. Romam flumine transeund5 redlre potes.

9. Magistra discendo se dedicavit.

10. Magnum amorem currendl habeo.

Name: Section: Date:

322 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 39

B. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses and translate.

1 . Aedificil mlrabilis (videre; gerundive) in transitu cu-

pidl eramus.

2. Ars pristina (scribere; gerund) laudabatur.

3. Consules veteres ad pacem (petere; gerundive) hben-

ter Tbunt.

4. Athenis exeamus et in transitu (requiescere) causa

rus peregrinemur.

C. Translate, using either a gerund or a gerundive in each sentence, in

accordance with the preferred Latin idiom.

1 . We went to Rome for the sake of hearing your oration.

2. By reading we become wiser.

3. He spoke in favor of (pro) freeing the city.

4. We learned much about writing well.

 . . :

Gerund and Gerundive 323

VJS VERBORUM

A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Iniuria > > "injurious."

2. Ventum > meaning /w// o/ u/W. windy.

3. Synonymous with mulier is

a. arbor b. femina c. humus d. pes

4. Transeo > transitus, -us, m. > "transit":: exeo >

>

5. Mortalis, -e > mortalitas, -tatis, f. > "mortality" ::

Hberalis, -e > > :

cupidus, -a, -um > >

6. Ventus navigare
: : : pes :

a. ambulare b. impedlre c. interficere d. suspendere

7. A synonym of vetus is

a. absens b. firmus c. Infirmus d. senex

8. Closest in meaning to necesse is

a. certus b. gratus c. idoneus d. immotus

9. Experior has a meaning in common with

a. recognosco b. queror c. obeo d. conor

B. Complete each statement with an Enghsh word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise").

1 . To "edify" someone is to up his moral or spiritual

character.

2. A "quasi-legal" measure only appears

it were lawful.

3. The true purpose of the "liberal arts" is to ones

mind from the mundane.

4. An urban "transit" system is supposed to help you

town efficiently.

Name: Sec! ion: Date:

324 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 39

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1 . EtsT es TnfTrmus, ml filT, forls Ire licet ad amlcos videndos.

2. IllI deo sublTml, satorT omnium hominum deorumque, vTnum opti-

mum irbare oportet.

3. Nisi magnum dolorem ferre aut perTre vTs, te armis quam celer-
rime 5rnare et hostes oppugnare necesse est.

4. Amicus vetus in talibus operibus exigendls multds dies laborare

solebat.

5. Post iter longissimum, quod forls dormlre metuit, flumen transiit

et domum nostrum ad pemoctandum ambulavit.

6. Omnes mulieres ex illo aedificio iniuriae vTtandae causa exierunt.

7. Propter dignitatem ac pectus llberale, imperator vetus odium erga

neminem habuit.
 Gerund and Gerundive 325

8. Cupidl ad Italiam navigandi, amTci meT, ventos navibus iterum ex-

periamur!

B. Answer these questions on the selections from Catullus, Martial, and

Nepos.

1 . Comment briefly on Catullus' use of the word dlcit in his poem 70

and on how it relates to the metaphors in verse 4.

2. Martiahs tres virtutes in Arria, uxore Paetl, in carmine suo

demonstrat — quae sunt? (Responde Anglice.)

3. Quis hanc vTtam Hannibalis scrTpsit? (Anglice.)

4. Cuius odium erga Romanes Hannibal conservavit? (Answer this

and the following questions with just one or two Latin words, as
indicated, using the correct case and any necessary prepositions.)

5. A quo el imperium datum est?

6. Cum Hannibal in Italiam inlret, quis fuit dux exercittis Cartha-

ginis in Hispania?

7. Quis exercitum trans Alpes ante Hannibalem duxerat?

8. Cum in Italiam inlsset. quo oculo, sinistro dextrove, Hannibal

bene uti poterat?

9. Quot imperatores ac milites Rdmanos superavit?

Omnia tempus habent . . . tempus nasccndl et tempus moriendl:

To everything there Is a .season . . . a time to he horn and a time to die
Ecclesiastes 3.2

Name: Section: Dale.

40
-Ne^ Num^ and Nonne in
Direct Questions; Fear
Clauses; Genitive and
Ablative of Description

INTELLEGENDA

Upon completion of this lesson you should be able to

1. Recognize and translate the uses of-ne, nutria and nonne in direct ques-
tions.

2. Define, recognize, and translate the subjunctive "fear clause."

3. Define, recognize, and translate the "genitive of description" and "abla-
tive of description" constructions.

Salvete postremum, lectrlces et lectores magnae sapientiae! Before beginning

these exercises, be sure you have thoroughly studied Chapter 40 of
Wheelock's Latin and memorized the new vocabulary by practicing aloud.
Denique ad ftnem accessistis: n5n iam discipulae discipuHque estis, sed domi-
nae dominlque illlus maximae linguae, Latlnae!
 -Ne, Num, and Nonne in Direct Questions; Fear Clauses; Genitive and Ablative of Description 327

GRAMMATICA
1. Direct questions may be introduced by an pronoun, by
other words such as ubi or cur, or by suffixing
first word of the sentence (often the verb, or some
to the
other word on which the question hinges).

2. The suffix introduces a question to which the answer

may be either "yes" or "no"; the word , however, intro-
duces a question expecting "yes" as an answer and the word
introduces a question to which a negative reply is antici-
pated.

3. A main clause containing a verb of fear or apprehension often pre-

cedes a subordinate clause introduced by the conjunction
, meaning , or by , meaning
; the introductory conjunctions are just the
opposite of what might be expected, because these subordinate fear
clauses were in origin essentially independent clauses.

4. The verb in a fear clause is in the mood and is often

translated, as seen from the examples in the text, with the auxiliaries
"will" or "would," "may" or "might."

Give the sentence number and list the subjunctive verbs in the five
fear clauses in Practice and Review sentences 1-12 and the Senten-
tiae Antlquae.

Sent. No. Subjunctive Sent. No. Subjunctive

6. A noun in either the case or the case,

when itself modified by an ., may be employed to modify
another noun; the of description was especially
common in describing traits; and both types of
descriptive phrases, like adjectives, are usually positioned
the noun that is being modified.

7. Give the sentence number and list the eight instances of the ablative of
description and the four instances of the genitive of description in
Practice and Review sentences 1-12 and Sententiae AntTquae 1-17;

Name: Section: Dale:

 .

328 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 40

include both the noun and the modifying adjective that make up the
phrase (note that in one of the sentences the same adjective modifies
two different descriptive nouns — hst them separately).
Sent. No. Abl. of Description Sent. No. Gen. of Description

EXERCITATIONES

A. Transform from singular to plural or plural to singular and then

translate.

1 N5nne vereris dominum veterem?

Transformation:

Translation:

2. Metuo ut metam omnlno adeam.

Transformation:

Translation:

3. Num mulieres monumenta reppererunt?

Transformation:

Translation:

4. Fabitume postremum de hoc opere?

Transformation:

Translation:
 -Ne, Num, and Nonne in Direct Questions; Fear Clauses; Genitive and Ablative of Description 329

5. Nonne dominl equos Infirmos fatlgabant?

Transformation:

Translation:

6. Timeo ne hoc saxum cadat.

Transformation:

Translation:

7. Num lacrimam in vultu eius vTdistl?

Transformation:

Translation:

8. Metuebamus ut magistrae illos libros explicarent.

Transformation:

Translation:

B. Translate.

1 . monumentum acre duro

2. mulieres dignitatis mlrabilis

3. animal pede Tnfirmo

4. iniuria magno dolore

5. femina mentis iTberalis

6. dux morum pristinorum

7. miles pectoris firm!

8. aedificium forma pulchra

C. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses and translate.

1 . Vereor ne istl hostibus auxilium (fero; pres.)

2. Romae fuerunt lot virT iusti ac feminae

(magna probilas; gen.).

Name: Section: Date:

 .

330 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 40

3. Num times ut domum ambulare (possum; 2nd pers.

sg. pres.)?

(answer "yes" is anticipated) humi sub arbore sede-

bant et loquebantur?

D. Translate into Latin, using standard word order and including all ma-
crons.

1 . You did discover those monuments, didn't you?

2. We feared that we would see tears on our mother's face.

3. The slave fears that his master may not be just.

4. You did not suppose, did you, that we would find so many men
of great wisdom?

vis VERBORUM
A. Answer these questions on the chapter's vocabulary list.

1 Which verb has a meaning related to for?

a. experior b. impedio c. iTbo d. loquor

2. Which verb has a meaning related to oplnor?

a. oportet b. oppugno c. puto d. queror

3. Which has ameaning related to reperio?

a. orno b. pemocto c. recognosco d. suspendo

4. Which has a meaning related to vereor?

a. suspendo b. timeo c. transeo d. vendo

5. Which does not belong?

a. aes b. arma c. ferrum d. sator
 .

-Ne, Num, and Nonne in Direct Questions; Fear Clauses; Genitive and Ablative of Description 331

6. Arrange left to right, from "head to toe": manus, oculus,

nasus, pes.

7. Which is sometimes a synonym of vultus?

a. odium b. os c. transitus d. ventus

8. Which has a meaning in common with postremum?

a. deinde b. denique c. libenter d. quasi

9. Which has a meaning in common with quTn?

a. etsT b. erga c. praeter d. quidem

10. Which has a meaning in common with iustus?

a. aequus b. cupidus c. necesse d. subllmis

1 1 Avarus > avaritia > "avarice" : : iustus >

>
1 2 Tantus quantus
: : : tot :

B. Complete each statement with an English word that demonstrates your

knowledge of the Latin etymology (e.g., "A 'laudatory' speech is full
of praise ").

1. "Lacrimal" ducts produce

2. A "saxifrage" is an herb that grows in the cracks in .

3. An "inexplicable" phenomenon can be

and an "indefatigable" worker can be
out.

4. An "infant" is, strictly speaking, a child who can

yet

LECTIONES

A. First read each sentence aloud twice, and then translate as literally as

possible within the limits of sound English idiom.

1. Nonne poeta monumentum acre perpeluo creavit?—

ille quTn. ut
opTnor, monumentum eius fuit etiam durius acre!

Name: Section: Date:

332 Workbook for Wheelock's Latin: Chapter 40

2. Num scTs utrum aes an saxum sit durius?

3. Timeo ne dominus tibi paucas lacrimas habeat.

4. Nonne mihi de his faberis, ml pater iustissime atque sator homi-

num deorumque, et postremum explicabis omnia quae de filio
meo repperistl?

5. Verita sum ut filius ad metam omnino accederet.

6. Amica ilhus poetae erat, ut opTnatus est, femina oculTs bellTs,

naso gracilT. atque omnino pulcherrimo vultu.

7. Timebam ne audltores oratione, quae tot argumenta difficilia con-

tinebat, fatlgaret.

8. Ille magister, vir magnae virtutis qui multa praemia alia docendl
causa transiit, nihil praeter mortem sine honore timuit.

B. Answer these questions on our final reading selections, from Virgil, Cic-
ero, and Horace, using one or more Latin or English words, as indi-

cated.

1. Quod nomen aliud Cytherea habet? (Anglice.)

2. Quando luppiter "Cemes urbem" inquit, in carmine Vergilil, de

qua urbe fatur? (Latine.)

3. Quis bellum in Italia geret? (Latine.)

 -Ne, Num, and Nonne in Direct Questions; Fear Clauses; Genitive and Ablative of Description 333

4. Quis Romam condet? (Latlne.)

5. Quis cum love Romam fovebit? (Latine.)

6. In Cicero's estimation, literature provides a holiday for the hu-

man (Anglice.)

7. Quas aetates, ut Cicero opTnatur, litterae adiuvant?

a. adulescentiam b. senectutem
c. tempora adversa d. omnia tempora

8. Quid litterae nobis temporibus malls dant? (Latine.)

9. Quid, ut opTnaris, est illud monumentum de quo Horatius dlcit?

(Anglice.)

Haec studia adulescentiam alunt, senectutem oblectant:

These studies nourish our youth and delight our old age
Cicero, on the value of literature and the humanities

Well, discipulae discipulique, we hope that your own studies have both nour-
ished your minds and delighted your hearts, and that your affection for
Latin will prove to be, in Horace's words, aere perennius; and so, ridete,
gaudete, carpite omnes dies vestros, atque postremum, lectores et lectrices,

valete!

Name: Section: Date:

ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Paul T. Comeau studied Latin, Classical Greek, and French for more
than four years at Joliette Seminary in Quebec. Part of a long military career,
from which he retired in 1975, was spent teaching French and serving as the
advisor for the Humanities and Social Sciences at the U.S. Air Force Acad-
emy. He received a B.A. in Liberal Arts fromAssumption College, an
M.A. in French Language and Literature and a Ph.D. in Romance Lan-
guages and Literatures, both from Princeton University. From 1975 to 1989,
as Professor of French and Head of the Department of Foreign Languages
at New Mexico State University, he established a two-year Latin program

and taught that language for nine years, along with courses in French lan-
guage, literature, and culture. A number of his articles have appeared in
French literary journals, and his publications include a book of literary his-
tory, Diehards and Innovators, the French Romantic Struggle: 1800-1830

(1988). He has received research grants from the National Endowment for
the Humanities and the Canadian Embassy. Now retired as Professor Emer-
itus of French, he is past President of the New Mexico Chapter of the Amer-
ican Association of Teachers of French and a Life Member of the Modem
Language Association of America.

ABOUT THE REVISION EDITOR

Richard A. LaFleur received the B.A. and M.A. in Latin from the
University of Virginia and the Ph.D. in Classical Studies from Duke Univer-
sity. He has taught since 1972 at the University of Georgia, where he is

currently Franklin Professor and (since 1980) Head of one of the largest
Classics programs in North America. He has numerous publications in the
fields of Latin language, literature, pedagogy, and teacher-preparation, in-

cluding five recent books. The Teaching of Latin in American Schools: A

Profession in Crisis, Latin Poetry for the Beginning Student, Love and Trans-
formation: An Ovid Reader, Latin for the 21st Century: From Concept to
Classroom, and the new, revised edition of Whee lock's Latin, by Frederic
Wheelock. Professor LaFleur is also editor of The Classical Outlook (since
1979) and a past President of the American Classical League (1984-1986).
He has been recipient of nearly half a million dollars in grants from the

National Endowment for the Humanities and other agencies and of state,

regional, and national awards for teaching and professional service, includ-
ing, in 1984, the American Philological Association's award for Excellence
in the Teaching of Classics.
FOREIGN LANGUAGE STUDY^ATIN ^ ,,

* '
, r

hen Professor Fre,deric M. Wheelock's Latin first appeared in 195,6, the reviews extolled its thor-
T , oughness, orgaoffzation, and conciseness; at least one reviewer predicted that the book "n^ight
well become the stajjdafd text" for int«5ducing students to elementary Latin. Now, more than four
decades later, that prediction has certainly proved accurate.
Workbook for Wheelock's Latin is an essential companion to the classic introductory textbookt
Designed to supplement the course of study in Wheelock's Latin, 6tJ^ Edition, each of the forty cha^terg
in this newlji updated edition features: ^ ^ .

• TRANSFORMATION DRILLS, WORU ANDT'HR.ASE TRANSLATIONS, AND ^

*bTHER EXERCISES DESIGNED TO TEST AND^HARPEN^HE STUDENT'S SKILLS
•
"WORD P0\\T:R" sections that focus ON VOCABULARY AND DERIVATIVES

TR/VNSLATION PRACTICE

STUDENTS NAME AND DATE

PRAISE FOR THE PREVIOUS EDITION OF

Wheelock's Latin
"LaFleur has done a great service for the study of Latin: this revised edition ensures the survival of a
textbook that has remained on the academic bestseller lists for more than forty years. The expanded
grammatical explanations are particularly valuable for today's students and teachers."
—Professor James M. May, St. Olaf College

"The new edition makes a world of difference." —Professor Robert A. Kaster, Princeton L^niversity

~fe~JJ
'^^J^t
Wheelock's
Latin ^„#^ l Also Available:

, ^.IUluriA.L.F1«.. — JT / WHEELOCK'S LATIN,

6th edition

WHEELOrK'"=; ! ATIN WQPKDOOK

j

MM HarperResource CU BOOKSTORE
An Imprint ofHuTperCoWmsPuhlishers
www.harpercollins.com mil 90000,

Cover design© 2000 by Irving Freeman

Cover photograph © by Giraudon/Arl Resource, NY
97800611"^' ^'"